Sanyo PCS Vision PM 8200 User Manual

SM  
PCSVision PicturePhone  
PM-8200  
Users Guide  
Using Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Using Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Selecting a Character Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Entering Characters Using T9 Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Entering Characters by Tapping the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Entering Symbols, Numbers, Preset Suffixes, and Smileys . . . . . . . . . .34  
2B. ControllingYour Phone’s Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Ringer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Selecting a Tone Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Setting a Start-up/Power-off Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Using Voice Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Alert Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Silence All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Changing the Text Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
Changing the Backlight Time Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Changing the Display Screen Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
Changing the Display for Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
Changing the Display for Area Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Changing the Display for Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
Changing the Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Changing the Display for My Buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Changing the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Changing the Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Location Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
TTY Use With PCS Service From Sprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Phone Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Auto Answer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Setting the Open/Close Flip Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
Setting Any Key Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Setting the Side Key Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Setting Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Headset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Setting Message Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Editing Preset Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Setting a Callback Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Setting the Current Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Using the Mini Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
2C. SettingYour Phone’s Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Accessing the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Using Your Phone’s Lock Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Locking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Unlocking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Locking the Pictures Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Changing the Lock Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Calling in Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Restricting Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Using Special Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Erasing the Contacts Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
Erasing All Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Resetting Your Pictures Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Resetting Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
Resetting and Locking Your Phone Through SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
SM  
Security Features for PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Enabling and Disabling PCS Vision Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
2D. ControllingYour Roaming Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73  
Understanding Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Setting Your Phone’s Roam Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Controlling Roaming Charges Using Call Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
2E. NavigatingThrough Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Viewing the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
2F. Managing Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Viewing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Call History Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Making a Call From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Saving a Phone Number From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Prepending a Phone Number From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
Erasing Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
2G. Using the Contacts Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Displaying the Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Adding a New Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Finding Contacts List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Contacts List Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Adding a Phone Number to a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Assigning Speed Dial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Editing a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Selecting a Ringer/Image Type for an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
Secret Contacts Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
Dialing PCS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
2H. Personal Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Managing the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Using Your Phone’s Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Adding an Event to the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Event Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Event Alert Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Viewing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Erasing a Day’s Events or Call Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Adding a Call Alarm to the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Call Alarm Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Call Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Editing a Call Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Viewing a Future/Past Day’s Scheduled Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Adding To Do List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Viewing the To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Editing To Do List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
Adding a To Do List Item to the Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
Deleting Items From the To Do List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
Viewing Memory in Your Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Purging All Events, Call Alarms, or To Do List Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Personal Information Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Displaying Your User Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Finding Icon Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Displaying the Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Displaying Advanced Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Using Your Phone’s Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Using the Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Using the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Using the World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Downloading Files Through PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Confirming the Downloaded Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Viewing the Downloaded Data Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
2I. UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
Using Voice-Activated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Making a Call Using Voice-Activated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Programming Voice Dial Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Reviewing Voice Dial Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Erasing All Voice Dial Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Managing Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Recording Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
Voice Memo Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Erasing Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Setting Up Screen Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Activating Screen Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Selecting an Announcement for Screen Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
Recording Your Name for a Pre-Recorded Announcement . . . . . . . .130  
Recording a Customized Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
Reviewing an Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
Erasing an Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131  
2J. Using PCS Ready Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132  
Getting Started With PCS Ready Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Setting PCS Ready Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Preparing Your Phone for PCS Ready Link Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Ready Link Call Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Making and Receiving a PCS Ready Link Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Displaying the PCS Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Selecting Contact Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135  
Making a PCS Ready Link Call (1-to-1 Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136  
Making a PCS Ready Link Call (Group Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137  
Making a PCS Ready Link Call by Entering a Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .138  
Missed Call Notification for PCS Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138  
Receiving a PCS Ready Link Call (1-to-1 Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139  
Receiving a PCS Ready Link Call (Group Call) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139  
Redialing a PCS Ready Link Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140  
PCS Ready Link Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140  
Adding and Editing Ready Link Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141  
Copying an Entry to Personal List or Personal Group List . . . . . . . . .141  
Saving a PCS Ready Link Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142  
Finding an Entry in the PCS Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142  
Adding a New Contact to Your Personal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143  
Adding a New Group to Your Personal Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144  
Editing a Contact in Your Personal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145  
Editing a Group in Your Personal Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145  
Erasing Ready Link List Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147  
Erasing an Entry in Your Personal List or Personal Group List . . . . . .147  
Erasing a PCS Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147  
Updating Your PCS Ready Link Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Updating the Company List and Personal List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Managing PCS Ready Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Setting Speed Dialing for PCS Ready Link Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148  
Restarting the Ready Link Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149  
Setting Ready Link Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149  
Setting Ringer Types for PCS Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Setting an Alert Notification for PCS Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . .150  
Setting the Speakerphone for PCS Ready Link Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
Setting the Default View of the PCS Ready Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151  
2K. UsingYour Phone’s Built-in Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152  
Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153  
SM  
Creating Your Picture Mail Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154  
Camera Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155  
Selecting Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159  
Viewing Your Camera’s Status Area Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160  
SM  
Sending Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162  
Sending Picture Mail From the In Camera Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162  
Sending Picture Mail from Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
Storing Pictures in My Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
In Camera Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165  
In Camera Folder Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166  
Saved to Phone Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168  
Managing Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170  
Using the Picture Mail Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170  
Managing Online Picture Mail From Your PCS Vision Phone . . . . . .170  
Uploading Your Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171  
Sending Online Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171  
AccessingOnlinePictureMailOptionsFromYourPCSVisionPhone . .172  
Section3:PCSServiceFeatures ......................174  
3A. PCSServiceFeatures:TheBasics ........................175  
Using Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176  
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176  
Voicemail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176  
New Voicemail Message Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177  
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177  
Voicemail Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179  
Clearing the Message Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181  
Voicemail Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182  
Using Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183  
Responding to Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183  
Making a Three-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184  
Using Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185  
SM  
3B. PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186  
Getting Started With PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187  
Your User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187  
Launching a PCS Vision Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189  
Net Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190  
PCS Vision Connection Status and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190  
Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191  
Understanding Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193  
Message Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193  
New Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193  
Message Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194  
Displaying Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194  
Displaying Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194  
Sending a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195  
Sending a Message in the Drafts Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196  
Sending a Message in the Outbox Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197  
Changing the Display Font Size of a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199  
Prepending a Phone Number From a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199  
Message Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200  
Erasing All Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Moving a Message Into Another Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201  
Erasing a Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
Erasing Selected Messages in All Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202  
Signing Up for Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203  
Using Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
Accessing Email Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
Composing Email Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204  
Accessing Alternate Email Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
Using Alternate Email Providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205  
Using Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206  
Accessing Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206  
Experiencing Wireless Online Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207  
Downloading Premium Services Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208  
Accessing Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210  
Accessing Ringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212  
Accessing Screen Savers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214  
Exploring the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216  
Using the Browser Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217  
Using PCS Business Connection Personal Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221  
PCS Vision FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222  
SM  
3C. PCS Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223  
SM  
Getting Started With PCS Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224  
Creating Your Own Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224  
Making a Call With PCS Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
Accessing Information Using PCS Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225  
Section4:SafetyGuidelinesandWarrantyInformation . .226  
4A. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227  
Getting the Most Out of Your Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228  
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229  
Caring for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231  
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice . . . . . . . . . . .232  
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234  
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249  
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249  
4B. Terms & Conditions and Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . .250  
Terms and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251  
Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275  
Welcome to Sprint  
Sprinthasthemostcomplete, all-digitalwirelessnetworkinthenation.  
Dependonit. We are committed to bringing you the best wireless  
technology available. With Sprint, you get the most complete,  
all-digital wireless network in the nation so all your services work  
the same wherever you go on the network. We built our network  
right from the start, so no matter where you are on the enhanced  
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, all your services – whether it’s  
Voicemail, Caller ID, email, or Picture Mail – will work the same.  
This guide will familiarize you with our technology and your new  
PCS Vision Phone through simple, easy-to-follow instructions. If  
you have already reviewed the StartHeretoActivate guide that was  
packaged with your new phone, then you’re ready to explore the  
advanced features outlined in this guide.  
If you have not read your StartHeretoActivate guide, go to  
Section One – Getting Started. This section provides all the  
information you need to unlock your phone, set up your voicemail,  
and much more. It also contains information on how to contact  
Sprint if you have any questions about your service, wish to check  
your account balance, or want to purchase additional products or  
services.  
Sprint is different. All your services work the same wherever you  
go on the most complete, all-digital wireless network in the nation.  
Welcome and thank you for choosing Sprint.  
i
Introduction  
This User’sGuide introduces you to PCS Service and all the features  
of your new phone. It’s divided into four sections:  
 Section1: Getting Started  
 Section2: Your PCS Vision Phone  
 Section3: PCS Service Features  
 Section4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information  
Throughout this guide, you’ll find tips that highlight special  
shortcuts and timely reminders to help you make the most of your  
new phone and service. The Table of Contents and Index will also  
help you quickly locate specific information.  
You’ll get the most out of your phone if you read each section.  
However, if you’d like to get right to a specific feature, simply locate  
that section in the Table of Contents and click on the page number  
to go directly to that page. Follow the instructions in that section,  
and you’ll be ready to use your phone in no time.  
Note: You can view this guide online or print it to keep it on hand. If you’re viewing  
it online, simply click on a topic in the Table of Contents or Index or on any page  
reference. The PDF will automatically display the appropriate page.  
ii  
Section 1  
Getting Started  
Section 1A  
Setting Up Service  
In This Section  
GettingStartedWithPCS Service  
SettingUpYourVoicemail  
PCSAccountPasswords  
GettingHelp  
SettingupserviceonyournewPCSVisionPhoneisquickandeasy.  
This section walks you through the necessary steps to set up  
your phone, unlock your phone, set up your voicemail, establish  
passwords, and contact Sprint for assistance with your PCS Service.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
2
Getting StartedWith PCS Service  
DeterminingifYourPhoneisAlreadyActivated  
If you received your phone in the mail or purchased it at a Sprint Store,  
it probably has already been activated. All you need to do is unlock  
your phone.  
If your phone is not activated, please refer to the Start Here Guide  
included with your phone.  
UnlockingYourPhone  
Tounlockyourphone,followtheseeasysteps:  
1. Press  
to turn the phone on.  
2. Press Unlock (left softkey).  
Note: To select a softkey, press the softkey button directly below the softkey text  
that appears at the bottom left and bottom right of your phone’s display screen.  
Softkey actions change according to the screen you’re viewing and will not  
appear if there is no corresponding action available.  
3. Enter your four-digit lock code. (For security purposes, the  
code is not visible as you type.)  
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your  
Social Security number or PCS Phone Number or try 0000. If none of these work,  
call PCS Customer Solutions at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
3
Setting Up YourVoicemail  
All unanswered calls to your PCS Vision Phone are automatically  
transferred to your voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned  
off. Therefore, you will want to set up your voicemail and personal  
greeting as soon as your PCS Vision Phone is activated.  
Tosetupyourvoicemail:  
1. Press and hold  
.
2. Follow the system prompts to:  
Create your passcode  
Record your greeting  
Record your name announcement  
Choose whether or not to activate One-Touch Message  
Access (a feature that lets you access messages simply by  
pressing and holding  
enter your passcode)  
, bypassing the need for you to  
Note: The voicemail setup process may vary in certain Affiliate areas.  
For more information about using your voicemail, see  
“Using Voicemail” on page 176.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
4
PCSAccount Passwords  
As a PCS customer, you enjoy unlimited access to your personal  
account information, your voicemail account, and your PCS Vision  
account. To ensure that no one else has access to your information,  
you will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.  
AccountPassword  
If you are the account owner, you’ll have an account password to sign  
on to www.sprintpcs.com and to use when calling PCS Customer  
Solutions. Your default account password is the last four digits of your  
Social Security number. If you are not the account owner (if someone  
else pays for your PCS Service), you can get a sub-account password  
VoicemailPassword  
You’ll create your voicemail password (or passcode) when you set up  
your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your Voicemail” on page 176 for  
more information on your voicemail password.  
PCSVisionPassword  
If you have a PCS Vision Phone, you can set up a PCS Vision Password.  
This optional password may be used to authorize purchase of  
Premium Services content and to protect personal information on  
multi-phone accounts.  
For more information or to change your passwords, sign on to  
www.sprintpcs.com or call PCS Customer Solutions at 1-888-211-4PCS  
(4727).  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
5
Getting Help  
VisitOurWebsite  
You can get up-to-date information on PCS Services and Options by  
signing onto our Website at www.sprintpcs.com.  
When you visit us online, you can  
Review coverage maps  
Learn how to use voicemail  
Access your account information  
Purchase accessories  
Add additional options to your service plan  
Check out frequently asked questions  
And more  
ReachingPCSCustomerSolutions  
You can reach PCS Customer Solutions many different ways:  
Dial  
on your PCS Vision Phone  
Sign on to your account at www.sprintpcs.com  
Call us toll-free at 1-888-211-4727 (Consumer customers),  
SM  
1-877-CLEARPY (253-2779) (PCS Clear Pay customers), or  
1-888-788-4727 (Business customers)  
Write to us at PCS Customer Solutions, P.O. Box 8077,  
London, KY 40742  
ReceivingAutomatedInvoicingInformation  
For your convenience, your phone gives you access to invoicing  
information on your PCS Account. This information includes  
balance due, payment received, invoicing cycle, and the number of  
minutes used since your last invoicing cycle. (Normal airtime usage  
will apply.)  
Toaccessautomatedinvoicing information:  
Press  
.
Note: This service may not be available in all Affiliate areas.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
6
PCSDirectoryAssistance  
You have access to a variety of services and information through  
PCS Directory Assistance, including residential, business, and  
government listings; assistance with local or long-distance calls;  
movie listings; and hotel, restaurant, shopping, and major local event  
information. There is a per-call charge and you will be billed for  
airtime.  
TocallPCSDirectoryAssistance:  
Press  
.
PCSOperatorServices  
PCS Operator Services provides assistance when placing collect calls  
or when placing calls billed to a local telephone calling card or third  
party.  
ToaccessPCSOperatorServices:  
Press  
.
For more information or to see the latest in products and services,  
visit us online at www.sprintpcs.com.  
Note: PCS Operator Services may not be available in all Affiliate areas.  
Section 1A: Setting Up Service  
7
Section 2  
Your PCS Vision Phone  
Section 2A  
Your PCS Vision Phone: The Basics  
In This Section  
FrontViewofYourPhone  
ViewingtheDisplayScreen  
SM  
FeaturesofYourPCSVision PicturePhonePM-8200  
TurningYour PhoneOnandOff  
UsingYourPhone’sBatteryandCharger  
DisplayingYourPhoneNumber  
MakingandAnsweringCalls  
EnteringText  
YourPCSVisionPhoneispackedwithfeaturesthatsimplifyyourlifeand  
expandyourabilitytostayconnectedtothepeopleandinformationthat  
areimportanttoyou. This section will guide you through the basic  
functions and calling features of your phone.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
9
FrontView ofYour Phone  
1. Earpiece  
S p r i n t  
M a r 0 1 , 0 4 ( M o n )  
1 2 : 3 0 p m  
2. Main LCD  
R-Link  
Web  
3. Softkey (left)  
17. Softkey (right)  
16. Side Call Key  
4. Navigation Key  
15. BACK  
5. MENU/OK  
14. Side Camera Key  
6. Camera Key  
13. END/POWER  
7. TALK  
12. SPEAKER Key  
11. Keypad  
8. Microphone  
9. Accessories Connector  
10. Charger Jack  
23. Antenna  
24. Headset  
Jack  
18. Speaker  
25. Ready Link  
(Memo) Button  
19. LED  
Indicator  
S p r i n t  
1 2 : 3 0 p M a r 0 1  
20. Sub LCD  
26. Side Volume  
Key  
21. Flash  
22. Camera  
Lens  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
10  
Key Features  
1. Earpiece: Lets you hear the caller’s voice.  
2. MainLCD(display): Displays the phone’s main menu, features,  
modes, etc.  
3. Softkey(left): Lets you select the menu corresponding to the  
bottom left line on the Main LCD.  
4. NavigationKey: Lets you navigate quickly and easily through the  
menu options. You can access menu shortcuts by pressing  
Right : Contacts, Left : My Shortcut, Up : Messaging, and  
Down : Downloads.  
5. MENU/OK: Lets you access the phone’s menus and select menu  
options.  
6. CameraKey: Lets you access the Pictures menu and take pictures.  
7. TALK: Lets you place or receive calls, answer Call Waiting, or use  
Three-Way Calling and Voice Dial.  
8. Microphone: To speak into or record your voice.  
9. AccessoriesConnector: Connects optional accessories such as a  
USB cable.  
10. ChargerJack: Connects the travel charger (included).  
11. Keypad: Lets you enter numbers, letters, and characters, and  
navigate within menus. Press and hold keys 2-9 for speed dialing.  
12. SPEAKERKey: Lets you place or receive calls in speakerphone  
mode. You can also use it to activate Voice Dial and Memo  
recording.  
13. END/POWER: Lets you turn the phone on/off, end a call, or  
return to standby mode.  
14. SideCameraKey: Lets you display the Pictures menu and take  
pictures.  
15. BACK: Lets you clear characters from the screen or display the  
previous page.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
11  
16. SideCallKey: Lets you place or receive calls without opening the  
phone.  
17. Softkey(right): Lets you select the menu corresponding to the  
bottom right line on the Main LCD.  
18. Speaker: Lets you hear the different ringers and sounds.  
You can mute the ringer when receiving incoming calls by  
pressing  
,
,
,
,
, or Side Camera key.  
19. LEDIndicator: Shows your phone’s connection status at a glance.  
20. SubLCD: Lets you monitor the phone’s status and see who’s  
calling without opening the phone.  
21. Flash: The built-in flash lets you take pictures in low light.  
You can also use it as a mini flashlight.  
22. CameraLens: The built-in camera lens lets you take pictures.  
23. Antenna: Fully extend the antenna for the best reception.  
24. HeadsetJack: Lets you insert the plug of a headset (sold  
separately) for hands-free phone use.  
25. ReadyLink(Memo)Button: Allows you to access the PCS Ready  
Link List or Voice Memo menu. (See “Using PCS Ready Link” on  
page 132 or “Managing Voice Memos” on page 126.)  
26. SideVolumeKey: Lets you adjust the receiver volume during a  
call or ringer volume in standby mode.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
12  
Viewing the Display Screen  
Your phone’s display screen provides a wealth of information about  
your phone’s status and options. This list identifies the symbols you’ll  
see on your phone’s display screen:  
shows your current signal strength. The more lines you have, the  
stronger your signal.  
means your phone cannot find a signal.  
tells you a call is in progress.  
indicates PCS Vision/PCS Ready Link access is dormant.  
indicates PCS Vision/PCS Ready Link access is active.  
indicates PCS Vision/PCS Ready Link access is disabled.  
indicates you have new text messages waiting.  
indicates you have new voicemail messages waiting. Press and  
hold  
to call your voicemail box.  
indicates you have text messages and voicemail messages waiting.  
indicatesyouareroaming” offtheSprintNationwidePCSNetwork.  
indicates the PCS Ready Link Service is enabled.  
indicates the PCS Ready Link Service is disabled.  
shows the level of your battery charge. The more black you see,  
the more power you have left. It displays  
while charging.  
indicates you have menus to scroll (in four directions).  
indicates a beep sound is set at level 1.  
indicates the vibrate feature is set.  
indicates volume level 4 or 1 and vibrate feature is set.  
indicates the voice call ringer setting is off.  
indicates all the sound settings are off.  
indicates the Location Service of your phone is enabled.  
indicates the Location Service of your phone is disabled.  
indicates you have a new caller’s message.  
indicates the Screen Call Auto setting is on.  
indicates you have new downloaded data.  
indicates your phone is in TTY mode.  
indicates Headset mode is set to PCS Ready Link and a headset is  
connected.  
indicates the speakerphone mode is set to on.  
Note: Display indicators help you manage your roaming charges by letting you  
know when you’re off the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network and whether you’re  
operating in digital or analog mode. (For more information, see Section 2D:  
Controlling Your Roaming Experience on page 73.)  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
13  
SM  
Features ofYour PCSVision Picture Phone  
PM-8200  
SM  
Congratulations on the purchase of your PCS Vision Picture Phone  
PM-8200 by Sanyo. This phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and  
reliable, and it also offers many significant features and service  
options. The following list previews some of those features and  
options and provides page numbers where you can find out more:  
Dual-band/tri-mode capability allows you to make and receive  
calls while on the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network and to roam  
on other analog and 800 and 1900 MHz digital networks where  
Sprint has implemented roaming agreements (page 73).  
SM  
PCS Vision provides access to the wireless Internet in digital  
mode (page 186).  
Email provides quick and convenient text messaging capabilities  
(page 204).  
SM  
PCS Voice Command lets you dial phone numbers by speaking  
someone’s name or the digits of their phone number (page 223).  
Games, ringers, screen savers, and other applications can be  
downloaded to your phone to make your PCS Vision Phone as  
unique as you are (page 208).  
The built-in organizer lets you schedule alerts to remind you of  
important events (page 99).  
Speed Dialing lets you call a phone number stored in your  
Contacts directory using one touch dialing (page 30).  
The Contacts directory can store up to 500 numbers and  
300 email and Web addresses in 300 entries (entries can store up  
to seven numbers each). A separate PCS Ready Link Contacts List  
provides easy access to up to 200 personal contacts and  
200 company-provided contacts.  
The built-in camera allows you to take full-color digital pictures,  
view your pictures using the phone’s display, and instantly send  
them to a family and friends using Picture Mail service (page 152).  
SM  
PCS Ready Link allows you to enjoy quick, two-way,  
“walkie-talkie-style” communication with one or several  
PCS Ready Link users (page 132).  
Large 1.8-inch, full-color display screen plus external display.  
The Side Call key lets you place or receive calls without opening  
the phone (page 19).  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
14  
TurningYour Phone On and Off  
TurningYourPhoneOn  
Toturnyourphoneon:  
Press  
.
Once your phone is on, it displays “Looking for service...” which  
indicates that your phone is searching for a signal. When your phone  
finds a signal, it automatically enters standby mode – the phone’s idle  
state. At this point, you are ready to begin making and receiving calls.  
If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a  
Power Save feature is automatically activated. When a signal is found,  
your phone automatically returns to standby mode.  
In Power Save mode, your phone searches for a signal periodically  
without your intervention. You can also initiate a search for  
PCS Service by pressing any key (when your phone is turned on).  
Tip: The Power Save feature helps to conserve your battery power when you are  
in an area where there is no signal.  
TurningYourPhoneOff  
Toturnyourphoneoff:  
Press and hold  
until you see the powering down  
animation on the display screen.  
Your screen remains blank while your phone is off (unless the battery  
is charging).  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
15  
UsingYour Phone’s Battery and Charger  
BatteryCapacity  
Your PCS Vision Phone is equipped with a Lithium Ion (LiIon) battery.  
It allows you to recharge your battery before it is fully drained.  
The battery provides approximately 3.0 hours of continuous digital  
talk time (1.7 hours in analog) or approximately 288 hours of  
continuous digital standby time (17 hours in analog).  
When the battery reaches 5% of its capacity, the low battery icon  
appears. When there are approximately two minutes of talk time left,  
the phone sounds an audible alert and then powers down.  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate mode, PCS Ready  
Link mode, and browser use affect the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Tip: Be sure to watch your phone’s battery level indicator and charge the battery  
before it runs out of power.  
InstallingtheBattery  
ToinstalltheLiIonbattery:  
1. Place the battery into the space beneath  
the antenna with the metal contacts at  
the bottom, facing downward.  
2. Gently press down until it’s in place and  
the battery release latch snaps.  
RemovingtheBattery  
Toremoveyourbattery:  
1. Make sure the power is off so that you  
don’t lose any stored numbers or  
messages.  
2. Push the battery release latch up and  
hold the battery.  
3. Pull the battery up and out at a 45-degree  
angle.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
16  
ChargingtheBattery  
Your PCS Vision Phone’s LiIon battery is rechargeable and should be  
charged as soon as possible so you can begin using your phone.  
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If your battery  
level becomes too low, your phone automatically turns off and you  
will lose all the information you were just working on. For a quick  
check of your phone’s battery level, glance at the battery charge  
indicator located in the upper-right corner of your phone’s display  
screen. If the battery charge is getting too low, the low battery icon  
(
) appears and the phone sounds a warning tone.  
Always use a Sprint-approved travel charger or vehicle power adapter  
to charge your battery.  
Warning! Using the wrong battery charger could cause damage to your phone  
and void the warranty.  
UsingtheTravel Charger  
Tousethetravelchargerprovidedwithyourphone:  
1. Plug the travel charger into a wall outlet.  
2. Plug the other end of the travel charger into the bottom of your  
phone (with the battery installed).  
Chargingwhenyourphoneisturnedon:  
The battery icon  
appears on the display while charging.  
when charging is complete.  
Chargingwhenyourphoneisturnedoff:  
The battery icon turns to  
The battery icon  
appears, and the message “BATTERY  
CHARGING--Power Off--” is shown on the display while  
charging. When the battery is completely discharged, you  
may wait for several minutes until the message is shown on  
the display. The battery icon turns to  
, and the message  
changes to “CHARGING COMPLETE--Power Off--” when  
charging is complete.  
It takes approximately 3.5 hours to fully recharge a completely  
rundown battery. With the Sprint-approved LiIon battery,  
you can recharge the battery before it becomes completely  
run down.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
17  
DisplayingYour Phone Number  
Just in case you forget your phone number, your PCS Vision Phone  
can remind you.  
Todisplayyourphonenumber:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
3. Select MyPhone# and press  
.
Note: To access the phone’s main menu, press  
from standby mode. Menu  
items may be selected by highlighting them with the navigation key and pressing  
, or you can press the number corresponding to the menu item on your keypad.  
Making andAnswering Calls  
Making Calls  
Placing a call from your PCS Phone is as easy as making a call from any  
land line phone. Just enter the number and press  
your way to clear calls.  
and you’re on  
Toplaceacallusingyourkeypad:  
1. Make sure your phone is on.  
2. Enter a phone number. (If you make a mistake while dialing,  
press  
to erase one digit at a time. Press and hold  
to erase  
the entire number.)  
3. Press or  
. (To place a call when you are roaming and  
Call Guard is enabled, see “Controlling Roaming Charges Using  
Call Guard” on page 77.)  
4. When you’re finished, press  
to end the call.  
or twice.  
Tip: To redial your last outgoing call, press  
Tip: When making calls off the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, always dial  
using 11 digits (1 + area code + phone number).  
You can also place calls from your PCS Phone by using PCS Voice  
SM  
Command (page 223), Speed Dialing (page 30), and using your  
Call History listings (page 83).  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
18  
Important: To maximize performance when using your PCS Phone, extend the  
antenna before a call and do not touch the antenna during a call (see page 228).  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Toplaceacallwiththeflipclosed:  
1. Make sure your phone is on.  
2. Press and hold the Side Call key (  
) on the right side of the  
phone. (You will see a message on the Sub LCD.)  
3. Follow the system prompts. (The call will be made in  
speakerphone mode, unless you have a headset attached to the  
phone.)  
Redial to redial the last number you called.  
VoiceDial to use the Voice Dial function (see “Using Voice-  
Activated Dialing” on page 124).  
4. When you’re finished, press and hold  
.
Note: To use a Voice Dial, you must have stored Voice Dial entries (see  
“Programming Voice Dial Tags” on page 124).  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
19  
Dialing Options  
Dialing options are displayed when you press Options (right softkey)  
after entering numbers in the phone’s standby mode.  
To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Call to dial the phone number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
SendMessage to send a text message. See page 195 for details.  
To send Picture Mail, see page 162.  
SavePhone# to save the phone number in your Contacts list. (See  
“Saving a Phone Number” on page 27.)  
Find to display Contacts list entries that end with the digits you  
entered. (See “Finding a Phone Number” on page 28.)  
H HardPause to insert a hard pause. (See “Dialing and Saving  
Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 28.)  
T 2-Sec. Pause to insert a 2-second pause. (See “Dialing and  
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 28.)  
Hyphen to insert a hyphen. (Hyphens are generally for visual  
appeal only; they are not necessary when entering numbers.)  
Note: To speed dial a phone number, press and hold the appropriate speed dial  
key (locations 2-9). See “Assigning Speed Dial Numbers” on page 94.  
This option appears when you enter four digits and press  
.
Abbrev. Dial to dial the phone number in your Contacts list that  
ends with the four digits you entered. (See “Using Abbreviated  
Dialing” on page 30.)  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
20  
Answering Calls  
Toansweranincomingcallwiththeflipopen:  
1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off, incoming calls  
go to voicemail.)  
2. Press  
or  
to answer an incoming call. (Depending on  
your phone’s settings, you may also answer incoming calls by  
opening the phone or by pressing any number key. See “Setting  
Any Key Answer” on page 58 for more information.)  
Toansweranincomingcallwiththeflipclosed:  
1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off, incoming calls  
go to voicemail.)  
2. When your phone rings or vibrates, press and hold the Side Call  
key (  
) on the right side of the phone. (The call will be  
answered in speakerphone mode.)  
– or –  
Open the phone to use the earpiece.  
Note: If the setting for Open Flip is not set to “Answer Call,” opening the phone  
will not answer the call. (See “Setting the Open/Close Flip Option” on page 57.)  
Your PCS Vision Phone notifies you of incoming calls in the  
following ways:  
The phone rings or vibrates.  
The LED flashes.  
The backlight illuminates.  
The screen displays an incoming call message.  
If available, the phone number of the caller is displayed.  
If the phone number is in your Contacts list, the contact’s name is  
displayed.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
21  
The following options are also displayed by pressing Options (right  
softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
CallGuard to answer the call when you are in roaming mode.  
See page 77 for setting Call Guard.  
Answer to answer the call.  
Answer:Speaker to answer the call in speakerphone mode.  
Don’tAnswer to hang up the incoming call and return to the Web  
or camera mode while you are in Web or Camera operation.  
(This feature appears only when PCS Vision access is dormant or  
when your phone is in camera mode.)  
ScreenCall to answer the call by using a pre-recorded  
announcement. (This feature appears only when you are in a  
PCS Service area or digital roaming area. See page 129.)  
QuietRinger to mute the ringer. (This feature appears only when  
the ringer is set.)  
Tip: Your PCS Phone offers additional ways to answer calls. (See page 56 for  
Auto Answer and see page 58 for Any Key Answer.)  
AnsweringaRoamCallWithCallGuardEnabled  
Call Guard is an option that helps you manage your roaming charges  
when making or receiving calls while outside the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network. Please see Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming  
Experience for more information about roaming.  
ToansweracallwhenyouareroamingandCallGuardisenabled:  
1. Press  
or  
. (The following message will appear:  
“Roaming rate applies. Please press [1] to accept.”)  
2. Press  
to answer the call.  
Note: When your phone is off, in an active PCS Vision Connection, or on a  
PCS Ready Link call, incoming calls go directly to voicemail.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
22  
EndingaCall  
To disconnect a call when you are finished:  
WiththeFlipopen:  
Close the phone or press  
.
WiththeFlipclosed:  
Press and hold  
.
Note: If the setting for Close Flip is not set to “end call,” closing the phone will not  
end the call. (See “Setting the Open/Close Flip Option” on page 57.)  
Tip: Time/Date is displayed when you press  
while the phone is in use.  
Using the Speakerphone  
The speakerphone feature lets you hear audio through the speaker  
and talk without holding the phone. When the speakerphone is  
activated, use the volume control keys on the side of the phone to  
adjust the volume.  
Toturnthespeakerphoneonduringacall:  
Press  
– or –  
.
Press Options (right softkey), highlight SpeakerOn, and press  
.
.
Toturnthespeakerphoneoffduringacall:  
Press  
– or –  
.
Press Options (right softkey), highlight SpeakerOff, and press  
Warning! Due to higher volume levels, do not place the phone near your ear  
during speakerphone use.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
23  
Changing the Ringer Volume  
To change the ringer volume, press the Side Volume key when the  
phone is open and in standby mode.  
Note: To change the ringer volume from the main menu, see “Adjusting the  
Phone’s Volume Settings” on page 41.  
Adjusting Volume During a Conversation  
When you need to adjust the receiver volume during a conversation,  
use the side volume key, or press the navigation key up or down  
while a call is in progress.  
Muting a Call  
There are times when it’s necessary to mute a call so that your caller  
does not hear you or certain background noise.  
TomuteacallwiththeFlipopen:  
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Mute, and press  
.
(When the phone is muted, “Mute” appears on the display.)  
TounmuteacallwiththeFlipopen:  
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Unmute, and press  
.
TomuteacallwiththeFlipclosed:  
Simply press  
(side of the phone).  
TounmuteacallwiththeFlipclosed:  
Press  
once again during a call.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
24  
Missed Call Notification  
When an incoming call is not answered, the Missed Call log is  
displayed on your screen.  
TodisplaytheMissedCallentry:  
Press View (left softkey). (To call an entry, highlight the entry  
you want to call and press  
or  
.)  
Calling Emergency Numbers  
You can place calls to 911 (dial  
and press  
),  
even if your phone is locked or your account is restricted. Once you  
dial the numbers, your phone will enter Emergency mode.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display the options. To select an option,  
highlight it and press  
.
MyPhone# to display your phone number.  
SpeakerOn to activate speakerphone mode. (If you are in  
speakerphone mode, the option will appear as SpeakerOff to  
deactivate.)  
UnlockPhone to unlock your phone (appears only if the phone is  
locked).  
ToexitEmergencymode:  
1. Press  
.
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display the options.  
Call911 to call 911.  
Call911:Speaker to call 911 in speakerphone mode.  
MyPhone# to display your phone number.  
ExitEmergency to exit Emergency mode.  
3. Highlight ExitEmergency and press  
.
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
25  
In-Call Options  
During a call, your phone displays menu options when you press  
Options (right softkey).  
To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Flash to answer an incoming Call Waiting call or to connect a third  
party during Three-Way Calling.  
Mute or Unmute  
Select Mute to mute your phone’s microphone. Select Unmute to  
reactivate the microphone.  
SpeakerOn or SpeakerOff to activate or deactivate speakerphone  
mode. You can adjust the speakerphone volume using the Side  
Volume key.  
Warning! Due to higher volume levels, do not place the phone near your ear  
during speakerphone use.  
Three-WayCall to call a third party.  
CallHistory to access the Call History menu. (See “Managing Call  
History” on page 83.)  
Contacts to access the Contacts menu. (See “Using the Contacts  
Directory” on page 88.)  
Messaging to access the Messaging menu. (See “PCS Messaging”  
on page 193.)  
Settings to access the Settings menu. (See “Controlling Your  
Phone’s Settings” on page 35.)  
Tools/Extras to access the Tools/Extras menu. (See “Personal  
Organizer” on page 99.)  
VoiceServices to access the Voice Services menu. (See “Using  
Your Phone’s Voice Services” on page 123.)  
Note: The Flash menu appears only for Call Waiting and Three-Way Calling.  
The Mute menu does not appear during a 911 call. The Three-Way Call menu  
does not appear in Roaming areas.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
26  
End-of-Call Options  
To display the following options, press Options (right softkey) within  
10 seconds after disconnecting a call.  
To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
CallAgain to dial the phone number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
SavePhone# to save the phone number in your Contacts list.  
GotoPhoneBook appears when the number is already in your  
Contacts list. (See “Saving a Phone Number” below.)  
Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls identified as No ID or  
Restricted.  
Saving a Phone Number  
Your PCS Vision Phone can store up to 500 phone numbers in up to  
300 Contacts entries (an entry may contain up to seven numbers).  
Each entry’s name can contain 16 characters. Your phone  
automatically sorts the Contacts entries alphabetically. (For more  
information, see Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory on page 88.)  
Tosaveanumberfromstandbymode:  
1. Enter a phone number.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight SavePhone# and press  
4. Select a label by highlighting Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, Fax,  
Other, or NoLabel and press  
5. Enter a name and press  
.
.
.
If you have already stored entries in the Contacts list, you are  
prompted to select the following entry modes:  
NewName to enter a new name.  
FromPh. Book to select a name from the Contacts entry list.  
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
After you have saved the number, the new Contacts entry is  
displayed. (See “Contacts List Entry Options” on page 92.)  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
27  
Finding a Phone Number  
You can search Contacts list entries for phone numbers that contain a  
specific string of numbers.  
Tofindaphonenumber:  
1. Enter the last four or more digits of the number and press  
Options (right softkey). The more numbers you enter, the more  
specific the search becomes.  
2. Highlight Find and press . (The Contacts entry that ends with  
the digits you entered appears.)  
3. Highlight your desired entry.  
Press  
Press  
to display the entry details.  
or to dial.  
Dialing and Saving Phone NumbersWith Pauses  
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with  
automated systems, such as voicemail or credit card billing numbers.  
There are two types of pauses available on your phone:  
HardPause sends the next set of numbers when you press  
.
2-Sec. Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after  
two seconds.  
Note: You can have multiple pauses in a phone number and combine 2-second  
and hard pauses.  
Todialorsavephonenumberswithpauses:  
1. Enter the phone number and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight either HardPause or 2-Sec. Pause and press  
.
(Hard pauses are displayed as a “H” and 2-second pauses as a “T”.)  
3. Enter additional numbers (for example, a passcode or an  
extension).  
4. To dial the number, press  
with a hard pause, press  
– or –  
or  
. (When dialing a number  
to send the next set of numbers.)  
To save the number in your Contacts list, press Options (right  
softkey), highlight SavePhone#, and press  
.
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
28  
Dialing From the Contacts Directory  
TodialdirectlyfromaContactsentry:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
Shortcut: Press the navigation key right to list entries.  
4. Use your navigation key to scroll through the Contacts list,  
highlight your desired entry, and press  
.
5. Highlight the number you want to call.  
6. Press Options (right softkey) for the menu options.  
7. Highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn and press to place a call.  
, or Call (left softkey) during  
Tip: You can also place a call by pressing  
step 5 above.  
,
Note: The icons next to each entry represent the Contacts labels (for example,  
Mobile, Home, Work, etc.). A triangle next to an icon means there is another  
number for the entry. Press the navigation key right or left to select the desired  
label/number.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
29  
Using Speed Dialing  
With this feature, you can dial your favorite entries using one key press  
for locations 2-9. (See “Assigning Speed Dial Numbers” on page 94.)  
Tousespeeddialforvoicecalls:  
From standby mode, press and hold the appropriate key for  
approximately two seconds.  
– or –  
From standby mode, press the appropriate key and  
press  
or  
.
The display confirms that the number has been dialed when it shows  
“Connecting...”.  
TousespeeddialforPCSReadyLinkcalls:  
From standby mode, press the appropriate key then press and  
hold  
. (See “Setting Speed Dialing for PCS Ready Link  
Entries” on page 148.)  
The display confirms that the number has been dialed when it shows  
“R-Link calling...”.  
Note: Speed dialing is not available when you are roaming; when you are  
roaming off the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, you must always dial using  
eleven digits (1 + area code + number).  
Using Abbreviated Dialing  
Abbreviated Dialing is another form of speed dialing. It allows you to  
dial a number by entering just the last four digits of any number in  
your Contacts directory. The Abbreviated Dialing option becomes  
available when you enter the last four digits of a phone number and  
press Options (right softkey).  
ToplaceacallusingAbbreviatedDialing:  
1. Dial the last four digits of a contact’s phone number.  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display the dialing options.  
3. Highlight Abbrev. Dial and press  
,
, or  
.
Note: If there are two or more matched numbers in your Contacts list, the  
number that comes first alphabetically will be dialed. If there is no matched  
number, your phone dials the number you set for abbreviated dial with the last  
4-digits you entered. (See “Setting Abbreviated Dialing” on page 59.)  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
30  
EnteringText  
Selecting a Character Input Mode  
Your PCS Vision Phone provides convenient ways to enter words,  
letters, punctuation, and numbers whenever you are prompted to  
enter text (for example, when adding a Contacts entry or when  
sending email messages).  
Tochangethecharacterinputmode:  
1. When you display a screen where you can enter text, press  
Mode (right softkey).  
2. Select a character input mode:  
T9Word to enter characters using predictive  
T9 Text Input (see next page).  
Alphabet to enter characters by tapping the keypad  
(see page 33).  
SYMBOL to enter symbols (see page 34).  
NUMBER to enter numbers (see page 34).  
PRESETSUFFIX to enter a preset suffix (see page 34).  
SMILEYS to enter “emoticons” (see page 34).  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
31  
Entering Characters Using T9Text Input  
T9 Text Input lets you enter text in your PCS Vision Phone by  
pressing keys just once per letter. (To select the T9Word mode when  
entering text, see “Selecting a Character Input Mode” on the  
previous page.)  
T9 Text Input analyzes the letters you enter using an intuitive word  
database and creates a suitable word. (The word may change as you  
enter more letters.) If the word you want does not display after you  
have entered all the letters, press  
to scroll through additional  
word selections. To accept a word and insert a space, press  
.
If you make a mistake, press to erase a single character. Press and  
hold to delete an entire entry.  
AddingaWordtotheT9Database  
If a word you want to enter does not display as an option when you  
are using T9 Text Input, you can add it to the database.  
ToaddawordtotheT9TextInputdatabase:  
1. Select the Alphabet input mode. (See “Selecting a Character  
Input Mode” on the previous page.)  
2. Enter the word using multi-tap text entry. (See “Entering  
Characters by Tapping the Keypad” on the next page.)  
3. Press Mode (right softkey), highlight T9Word, and press  
.
(The word will appear as an option the next time you scroll  
through options during T9 Text Input.)  
For more information about T9 Text Input, visit the Tegic Website at  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
32  
Entering Characters byTapping the Keypad  
To enter characters by tapping the keypad, select the Alphabet mode  
(see “Selecting a Character Input Mode” on page 31). Press the  
corresponding key repeatedly until the desired character appears.  
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and following  
letters are lowercase.  
Characters scroll in the following order:  
English Sequence  
Key  
Upper Case  
Lower Case  
.,@ 1 ? ! # /  
*
A B C 2  
a b c 2  
D E F 3  
G H I 4  
J K L 5  
M N O 6  
P Q R S 7  
T U V 8  
W XY Z 9  
0
d e f 3  
g h i 4  
j k l 5  
m n o 6  
p q r s 7  
t u v 8  
w x y z 9  
Space  
Unshifted One-character- shifted Caps Lock  
In Spanish mode, characters scroll in the following order:  
Spanish Sequence  
Key  
Upper Case  
Lower Case  
.,@ 1 ¿ ? ¡ ! # /  
*
A Á B C 2  
a á b c 2  
D E É F 3  
G H I Í 4  
J K L 5  
d e é f 3  
g h i í 4  
j k l 5  
M N Ñ O Ó 6  
P Q R S 7  
T U Ú Ü V 8  
W XY Z 9  
0
m n ñ o ó 6  
p q r s 7  
t u ú ü v 8  
w x y z 9  
Space  
Unshifted One-character- shifted Caps Lock  
(See page 63 for changing to Spanish language mode.)  
After a character is entered, the cursor automatically advances to the  
next space after two seconds or when you enter a character on a  
different key.  
Tip: The beginning of the word after the space is changed to upper/lower case  
depending on shift mode. You can change the shift mode by pressing  
.
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
33  
Entering Symbols,Numbers,Preset Suffixes,and  
Smileys  
Toentersymbols:  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight SYMBOL and press  
.
3. Highlight the line that includes your desired symbol.  
4. Press the corresponding key (1-8) with each symbol.  
– or –  
Highlight your desired symbol by using the navigation key and  
press  
.
Toenternumbers:  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight NUMBER and press  
.
3. Press the corresponding number key to enter the number.  
Shortcut: Press and hold the corresponding number key to enter the number  
directly in alphabet mode or T9 mode.  
Toenterpresetsuffixes:  
The Preset Suffix menu is a preprogrammed list of common prefixes,  
suffixes, and punctuation strings (for example, “www., “.com”, and  
“//”) designed to make text entry easier and more efficient.  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight PRESETSUFFIX and press  
3. Highlight your desired word by using the navigation key and  
press  
.
.
Toenteremoticons(smileys):  
1. In a text entry field, press Mode (right softkey).  
2. Highlight SMILEYS and press  
.
3. Highlight the line that includes your desired smiley.  
4. Press the corresponding key (1-4) with each smiley.  
– or –  
Highlight your desired smiley by using the navigation key and  
press  
.
Note: Preset Suffix and Smileys do not apply in PCS Ready Link mode.  
Section 2A: Your PCS Vision Phone – The Basics  
34  
Section 2B  
Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
In This Section  
SoundSettings  
DisplaySettings  
LocationSettings  
AirplaneMode  
TTYUseWithPCSServiceFromSprint  
PhoneSetupOptions  
UsingthemenuoptionsavailableonyourPCSVisionPhone, youcan  
customizeyourphonetosound, look, andoperatejustthewayyouwantitto.  
This section describes how you can change your phone’s settings to  
best suit your needs. Take a few moments to review these options and  
to adjust or add settings that are right for you.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
35  
Sound Settings  
Ringer Types  
Ringer types help you identify incoming calls and messages. You can  
assign ringer types to individual Contacts entries, types of calls, and  
types of messages.  
PreprogrammedRingers include a variety of standard ringer types  
and familiar music.  
VibratingRinger alerts you to calls or messages without  
disturbing others.  
DownloadedRingerscan be downloaded right to your phone.  
(See “Downloading Premium Services Content” on page 208 and  
“Ringers” on page 212.)  
SelectingRingerTypesforVoiceCalls  
Your PCS Vision Phone provides a variety of ringer options that allow  
you to customize your ringer and volume settings. These options  
allow you to identify incoming calls by the ringer.  
Toselectaringertypeforvoicecalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select VoiceCalls and press  
.
6. Select the menu under WithCallerID or NoCallerID and press  
.
7. Select your desired ringer type and press  
.
RingerType to select a ringer type. Scroll through available  
ringers to hear previews.  
Ringer&Voice to notify you with Ringer & Voice for voice calls.  
Vibrate to notify you by vibrating.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download (see page 115).  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
36  
Toselectadistinctiveringerforvoicecallswhileroaming:  
1. Follow steps 1-5 on the previous page.  
2. Select the menu under Roaming and press  
.
3. Select Distinctive and press  
.
To confirm the ringer, press Play (right softkey).  
If you want to deactivate this feature, select Normal during  
step 3 above.  
SelectingRingerTypesforPCSReadyLinkCalls  
ToselectaringertypeforPCSReadyLinkcalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
5. Select ReadyLinkCalls and press  
6. Select the menu under ReadyLinkCalls and press  
.
.
.
7. Select your desired ringer type and press  
.
RingerType to select a ringer type. Scroll through available  
ringers to hear previews.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
37  
SelectingRingerTypesforMissedPCSReadyLinkCalls  
ToselectaringertypeforMissedPCSReadyLinkcalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
5. Select R-LinkMissed and press  
6. Select the menu under R-LinkMissed and press  
.
.
.
7. Select your desired ringer type and press  
.
RingerType to select a ringer type. Scroll through available  
ringers to hear previews.  
Vibrate to notify you by vibrating.  
SelectingRingerTypesforVoicemail  
Toselectaringertypeforvoicemail:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select Voicemail and press  
.
6. Select the menu under Voicemail and press  
.
7. Select your desired ringer type and press  
.
RingerType to select a ringer type. Scroll through available  
ringers to hear previews.  
VoiceRinger to notify you with Voice for voicemail.  
Vibrate to notify you by vibrating.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download (see page 115).  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
38  
SelectingRingerTypesforMessages  
Toselectaringertypeformessages:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select Messaging and press  
.
6. Select the menu under Messaging and press  
.
7. Select your desired ringer type and press  
.
RingerType to select a ringer type. Scroll through available  
ringers to hear previews.  
VoiceRinger to notify you with Voice for Messages.  
Vibrate to notify you by vibrating.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download (see page 115).  
SelectingRingerTypesforCalendar  
Toselectaringertypeforcalendar:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select Calendar and press  
.
6. Select the menu under Calendar and press  
.
7. Select your desired type and press  
.
RingerType to select a ringer type. Scroll through available  
ringers to hear previews.  
VoiceRinger to notify you with Voice for calendar events.  
Vibrate to notify you by vibrating.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download (see page 115).  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
39  
Selecting a Tone Length  
Longer tone lengths may be better for tone recognition when dialing  
voicemail or other automated systems.  
Toselectatonelength:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Sounds and press  
4. Select Others and press  
.
.
.
5. Select the menu under ToneLength and press  
6. Select Short or Long and press  
.
.
Setting a Start-up/Power-offTone  
1. Follow steps 1-4 in “Selecting a Tone Length.”  
2. Select the menu under Start-upTone or Power-offTone and  
press  
.
3. Select your desired tone and press  
.
Tone to select a tone. Scroll through available tones to hear  
previews.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select a tone to  
download (see page 115).  
Tip: You can set the volume of Start-up Tone and Power-off Tone. See next page.  
Using Voice Prompt  
This feature allows you to hear voice prompts at Voice Memo,  
Screen Call setting, Voice Dial, etc. (default setting is On).  
Todeactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Sounds and press  
4. Select Others and press  
.
.
.
5. Select the menu under VoicePrompt and press  
6. Select Off and press  
.
.
Tip: When ringer volume is set to “Silence All,” voice prompts cannot be heard.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
40  
Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings  
You can adjust your phone’s volume settings to suit your needs and  
your environment.  
Toadjusttheringer,start-up/power-off,orkeybeepvolume:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select Ringer/KeyVol. and press  
.
5. Select the item you wish to change and press  
.
RingerVolume to adjust Ringer tone volume.  
Start-up/Pw-off to adjust Start-up/Power-off tone volume.  
KeyBeep to adjust Key Beep tone volume.  
6. Adjust a volume level by pressing the navigation key up or down  
and press  
.
RingerOff to set the Voice Call ringer volume to off. (Only  
appears in Ringer Volume setting.)  
SilenceAll to set all the ringer volumes settings to off.  
(Only appears in Ringer Volume setting. See “Silence All” on  
page 43.)  
Toadjusttheearpieceorspeakervolume:  
1. Follow steps 1-3 above.  
2. Select ReceiverVol. and press  
3. Select either Earpiece or Speaker and press  
4. Adjust a volume level by pressing the navigation key up or down  
and press  
.
.
.
Tip: You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (or the earpiece volume  
during a call) by using the Side Volume key.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
41  
Alert Notification  
Your PCS Phone can alert you with an audible tone when you change  
service areas, once a minute during a voice call, for incoming or  
missed PCS Ready Link calls, or when a call has been connected.  
Service sets alert on or off for network services parameter  
changes.  
ReadyLinkCalls sets an alert to notify you of PCS Ready Link calls.  
R-LinkMissed sets an alert to notify you of missed PCS Ready Link  
calls.  
Voicemail sets an alert to notify you of voice messages.  
Messaging sets an alert to notify you of text messages.  
MinuteBeep sets a minute reminder that beeps ten seconds before  
the end of each minute during a call.  
SignalFade sets an alert to notify you when your phone loses a  
signal during a call.  
Tosetalerts:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Sounds and press  
4. Select Alerts and press  
.
.
.
5. Select your desired option and press  
.
6. If you selected Service, MinuteBeep, or SignalFade, select On and  
press . If you selected ReadyLinkCalls, R-LinkMissed,  
Voicemail, or Messaging, select Once or RepeatAlert and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
Tip: Repeat Alert sounds an alert every two minutes for twenty minutes.  
Tip: To set alerts for PCS Ready Link calls, see “Setting an Alert Notification for  
PCS Ready Link Calls” on page 150 for details.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
42  
SilenceAll  
There may be times when you need to silence your phone entirely.  
The phone’s Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds without  
turning your phone off.  
ToactivateSilenceAll:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select Ringer/KeyVol. and press  
.
5. Select RingerVolume and press  
.
6. Press the navigation key down until SilenceAll appears on the  
display and press  
.
Tip: When Ringer Volume is set as Silence All, other items are changed to Off and  
cannot be highlighted.  
TodeactivateSilenceAll:  
Press the volume key up repeatedly to select a desired  
volume level.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
43  
Display Settings  
Changing theText Greeting  
The text greeting can be up to fifteen characters and is displayed on  
your phone’s screen in standby mode. You may choose to display a  
custom greeting or you may display “Sprint” on the phone’s screen.  
Todisplayorchangeyourcustomgreeting:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select Greeting and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Custom and press  
.
You can customize the greeting by entering a personalized  
greeting. (See “Entering Text” on page 31.)  
6. Press  
.
Todisplaythedefaultgreeting(“Sprint”):  
1. Follow steps 1-4 above.  
2. Select Default and press  
.
When you are in PCS Ready Link mode, “Ready Link”  
appears on the display instead of “Sprint.”  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
44  
Changing the BacklightTime Length  
The backlight setting lets you select how long the display screen and  
keypad are backlit after any key press is made.  
TochangetheMainLCDorSubLCDbacklightsetting:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select Backlight and press  
.
.
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
6. Select AlwaysOn, AlwaysOff, or your defined time length and  
press  
.
AlwaysOff always turns the backlight off.  
AlwaysOn keeps the backlight on indefinitely.  
Note: The Always On setting returns to the previous value the next time you turn  
on the phone.  
TochangetheKeypadbacklightsetting:  
1. Select Key during step 5 above, and press  
.
2. Select AlwaysOff or your defined time length and press  
.
Note: Long backlight settings affect the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
45  
Changing the Display ScreenAnimation  
Your new PCS Vision Phone offers options for what you see on the  
display screen during various phone functions.  
Tochangethedisplayanimation:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select Animation and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Standby, OutgoingCalls, or ServiceSearch, and press  
6. Select the menu under the item and press  
.
.
7. Select your desired option and press  
.
Press Preview (right softkey) to see a sample display.  
For standby, you will also set the animation starting time.  
Select the option under after and press , then highlight  
your desired setting time and press  
.
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download (see page 116).  
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 7 above.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
46  
Changing the Display for Incoming Calls  
You can set the color or downloaded image to be shown on the  
Incoming Calls display.  
Tosetyourincomingcallsdisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select IncomingCalls and press  
.
5. Select the menu under IncomingCalls and press  
.
6. Select your desired color or downloaded image and press  
.
Preset to select the pre-programmed color image.  
Off to turn the image type off.  
Downloads to set a downloaded image saved in your phone.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download (see page 116).  
InCamera to set a picture saved in your In Camera folder.  
SavedtoPh. to set a picture saved in your Saved to Phone  
folder.  
Press Preview (right softkey) during step 6 above to see an  
example display. Press the right softkey to switch between  
Main/Sub LCD’s display preview.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
47  
Changing the Display for Area Name  
This feature enables you to show the area of the phone number you  
are calling or are called from when the number is not registered in  
your Contacts list. For example, a call to or from 213-555-5555 will  
display “California.”  
Tosetyourareanamedisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select MatchAreaCode and press  
.
5. Select On or Off and press  
.
This feature is available only when the phone number is  
10 digits, or 11 digits beginning with 1 and matches an  
area code.  
The area name will not be displayed for numbers in your  
Contacts list or for incoming calls when an Animation  
Ringer is assigned.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
48  
Changing the Display for Standby Mode  
This feature enables you to select a variety of items to display in  
standby mode.  
Tosetyourstandbydisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select StandbyDisplay and press  
.
5. Select your desired item and press  
.
ScreenSaver selects the screen saver to display.  
Calendar displays the Calendar.  
DigitalClock displays the local time in digital view.  
AnalogClock displays the local time in analog view.  
WorldClock displays the time of the selected city or country  
along with the local time. You can scroll the World Clock list  
by pressing the navigation key right or left. Press Summer  
(left softkey) or Standard (right softkey) to change between  
Daylight Savings and standard time if applicable. (The “  
icon indicates Daylight Savings time.)  
Tip: You can also display the World Clock from Tools/Extras menu. (See “Using  
the World Clock” on page 112.)  
Default returns the standby display to its default setting.  
6. Press  
to save the setting to follow each system prompt or  
when confirming the preview display.  
Tip: In an area without service, Screen Saver, Calendar, Digital Clock,  
Analog Clock, or World Clock cannot be shown on the standby display.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
49  
Changing the Screen Saver  
Your new PCS Phone offers you the option of displaying a screen  
saver while in standby mode.  
Toassignascreensaver:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select StandbyDisplay and press  
.
5. Select ScreenSaver and press  
.
6. Select the menu under ScreenSaver and press  
.
7. Select your desired screen saver and press  
.
Preset to select a pre-installed screen saver.  
Downloads to set a downloaded image saved in your phone.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download (see page 116).  
InCamera to set a picture saved in your In Camera folder.  
SavedtoPh. to set a picture saved in your Saved to Phone  
folder.  
8. Press Save (left softkey) to save the screen saver.  
To see a display preview of an image, press Preview (right  
softkey) during step 7 above. Press the right softkey to  
switch between Main/Sub LCD’s display preview.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
50  
Changing the Display for My Buddy  
This feature enables you to see a funny animation for 30 seconds on  
the Main LCD by opening the flip.  
ToactivateordeactivateMyBuddy:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select MyBuddy and press  
.
.
.
5. Select On or Off and press  
.
Press Preview (right softkey) during step 5 above to see a  
display preview. Press the right softkey to switch between  
Main/Sub LCD’s display preview.  
Press Info (left softkey) to see My Buddy information.  
Changing the Background  
You can customize your phone display’s appearance by selecting a  
color scheme to reflect your personality.  
Tochangethedisplay’sbackground:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select Background and press  
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
6. Select your desired color and press  
.
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
51  
Changing the Font Size  
You can change the font size settings for the message notification and  
browser.  
Tochangethefontsize:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Display and press  
4. Select FontSize and press  
.
.
.
5. Select either Message or Browser and press  
.
6. Select your desired font size.  
Press Preview (right softkey) to display a font size example.  
7. Press  
to set the selected font.  
Tip: From the font example display, select your desired font size by pressing the  
navigation key right or left.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
52  
Location Settings  
Your PCS Vision Phone is equipped with a Location feature for use in  
connection with location-based services that may be available  
in the future.  
The Location feature allows the network to detect your position.  
Turning Location off will hide your location from everyone  
except 911.  
Note: Even if the Location feature is enabled, no service may use your location  
without your express permission.  
Toenableyourphone’sLocationfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Location and press  
.
4. You will see a message on the display. Press  
or OK (left  
softkey) to continue.  
Press the navigation key down to read the whole message.  
5. Select On and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
When the Location feature is on, your phone’s standby screen will  
display the  
display.  
icon. When Location is turned off, the  
icon will  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
53  
Airplane Mode  
Airplane Mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features, such  
as Games, Voice Memos, etc., when you are in an airplane or in any  
other area where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited.  
When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive any  
calls or access online information.  
TosetyourphonetoAirplaneMode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select AirplaneMode and press  
.
5. You will see a message on the display. Press  
or OK (left  
softkey) to continue.  
Press Cancel (right softkey) to return to previous menu.  
6. Select On and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6.  
While in Airplane Mode, your phone’s standby screen will display  
“Phone Off.”  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
54  
TTY UseWith PCS Service From Sprint  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard  
of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to  
communicate by telephone.  
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with  
the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it supports digital  
wireless transmission. Your phone and TTY device will connect via a  
special cable that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable  
was not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device  
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.  
When establishing your PCS Service, please call PCS Customer  
Solutions via the state Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by  
first dialing  
. Then provide the state TRS with  
this number: 866-727-4889.  
ToturnTTY modeonoroff:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Others and press  
.
.
4. Select TTY and press . (You will see a message on the display.)  
5. Press or OK (left softkey) to continue.  
6. Select Enable or Disable and press  
.
Note: When you connect TTY devices, your phone will display in TTY mode.  
If TTY mode is enabled, the audio quality of non-TTY devices connected to the  
headset jack may be impaired.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE: 911 Emergency Calling  
Sprint recommends that TTY users make Emergency calls by other means,  
including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog cellular, and  
landline communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted when  
received by public safety answering points (PSAPs) rendering some  
communications unintelligible. The problem encountered appears related to TTY  
equipment or software used by PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the  
attention of the FCC, and the wireless industry and PSAP community are  
currently working to resolve this.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
55  
Phone Setup Options  
Shortcut  
Your phone offers you the option of assigning a shortcut key to a  
favorite or often-used function. Pressing the navigation key to the left  
in standby mode will launch your personally designated shortcut.  
Toassignyourshortcutkey:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select MyShortcut and press  
.
5. Select the menu under MyShortcut and press  
.
6. Select your desired menu option and press  
.
Press Info (right softkey) during step 5 above to see an  
information screen.  
AutoAnswer Mode  
You may set your phone to automatically pick up incoming calls  
when connected to an optional hands-free car kit and headset (sold  
separately).  
TosetAutoAnswermode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select AutoAnswer and press  
.
5. Select CarKit/Headset or SpeakerPhone and press  
.
6. Select either 5Seconds or 15Seconds and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
56  
Setting the Open/Close Flip Option  
This feature enables you to answer an incoming call by opening the  
flip or to end a call by closing the flip.  
ToactivatetheOpenFlipfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select Open/CloseFlip and press  
5. Select Open and press  
.
.
6. Select AnswerCall and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select NoAction during step 6.  
ToactivatetheCloseFlipfeature:  
1. Follow steps 1-4 above.  
2. Select Close and press . (You will see a message on the display.)  
3. Press OK (left softkey) to continue.  
4. Select EndCall and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Mute during step 4.  
Note: This feature does not apply when you are using the speakerphone,  
a headset, or a car kit.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
57  
Setting Any KeyAnswer  
This feature allows you to answer incoming calls by pressing  
any key (except  
,
,
,
,
,
, Side Camera Key,  
Softkey [right], or Navigation Key).  
Toactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select AnyKeyAnswer and press  
.
5. Select On and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
Setting the Side Key Guard  
This feature enables you to lock your side keys (Ready Link [Memo]  
button, Side Volume key, Side Call key, and Side Camera key) while  
the flip is closed.  
Toactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select SideKeyGuard and press  
.
5. Select On and press  
.
KeyGuard appears on the Sub LCD when you press any side  
key while the flip is closed.  
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
Note: This feature does not apply when the flip is open.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
58  
Setting Abbreviated Dialing  
Abbreviated Dialing is another form of speed dialing. It allows you to  
dial a number by entering just the last four digits of any number in  
your Contacts Directory. If the last four digits you enter do not match  
any stored Contacts entry, the digits are automatically prepended  
with the area code and prefix you specify.  
Toactivatethisfeature:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select Abbrev. Dial and press  
5. Select Enable and press  
.
.
6. Enter a six-digit number (area code and prefix) and press  
or  
OK (left softkey).  
To deactivate this feature, highlight Disable during step 5  
above.  
Tip: If you enter fewer than 6 digits, the display shows a warning message.  
(See “Using Abbreviated Dialing” on page 30.)  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
59  
Headset Mode  
This feature allows you hands-free phone use. Set the headset mode  
to Voice Call or Ready Link and press the Turbo Button (the operation  
button) on the headset to activate useful functions.  
Tosetheadsetmode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select HeadsetMode and press  
.
5. Select VoiceCall or ReadyLink and press  
.
Press Info (right softkey) during step 5 above to see the  
Headset Mode information screen.  
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 5 above.  
Usingthephonewithheadsetmodeactivated:  
VoiceCall: Press the Turbo Button to activate Voice dial. Press  
twice to redial the last call. Press and hold the button to record a  
Voice Memo.  
ReadyLink: Press and hold the Turbo Button to redial the last  
PCS Ready Link call.  
Note: If your headset doesn’t have a Turbo Button, set headset mode to Off.  
Sleep Mode  
This feature helps conserve your battery power by restricting the  
display.  
Tosetsleepmode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select SleepMode and press  
.
5. Select MainLCD or SubLCD and press  
.
.
6. Select your desired option and press  
To deactivate this feature, highlight Off during step 6 above.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
60  
Setting Message Notification  
You can see a pop-up message notification when you receive a text  
message or Voicemail while you are in PCS Vision applications,  
browser mode, or Voice Calls.  
Tosetmessagenotification:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Messaging and press  
.
4. Select DisplayPop-up and press  
.
5. Highlight the box and press  
to check/uncheck the box next  
to Games/Apps, Browser, or VoiceCalls.  
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
Press Info (right softkey) during step 5 above to see the  
Messages information.  
Editing Preset Messages  
Your phone can store pre-set messages for use with text messaging  
and Picture Mail. You can edit your phone’s default preset messages  
through the Settings menu. (For more information on using preset  
messages, see page 195.)  
Toedityourphone’spresetmessages:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Messaging and press  
.
4. Select PresetMsgs and press  
5. Select the message you want to edit and press  
6. Use your keypad to edit the message and press OK (left softkey)  
.
.
or  
to save your changes. (“Preset Msg Saved” will display.)  
To reset all messages, press Options (right softkey), select  
ResetAllMsgs, and press  
during step 5 above.  
Note: For information on editing text, see “Entering Text” on page 31.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
61  
Setting a Callback Number  
With this feature, you can notify your recipients of your callback  
number with the text message.  
Tosetthecallbacknumber:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Messaging and press  
.
4. Select SendCallback# and press  
.
5. Select an option from the following and press  
.
None to send no callback number.  
MyPhone# to send your phone number.  
Other to send a specific callback number. To set a number,  
enter a phone number and press  
.
Setting the CurrentTime  
Tosetthecurrenttimewhenyouareroaminginanareawithno  
digitalnetwork:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Others and press  
.
4. Select SetTime/Date and press  
.
5. Set the current time and date and press  
.
Note: This feature is only available when you are in an area with no digital  
network available.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
62  
Display Language  
You can choose to display your PCS Phone’s onscreen menus in  
English or in Spanish.  
Toassignalanguageforthephone’sdisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Others and press  
4. Select Language and press  
.
.
.
5. Select English or Español and press  
.
Using the Mini Flashlight  
This function allows you to use the phone’s camera flash as a  
miniature flashlight. To use this function, your phone must be in  
standby mode with the Side Key Guard unlocked. (See page 58 for  
unlocking the Side Key Guard.)  
Tousetheminiflashlight:  
With the phone closed and in standby mode, press and hold the  
Side Volume key (  
). (The light flashes for 8 seconds.)  
Note: This function doesn’t apply when a Missed Call or Notification is displayed.  
Section 2B: Controlling Your Phone’s Settings  
63  
Section 2C  
Setting Your Phone’s Security  
In This Section  
AccessingtheSecurityMenu  
UsingYourPhone’sLockFeature  
RestrictingCalls  
UsingSpecialNumbers  
ErasingtheContactsDirectory  
ErasingAllDownloads  
ResettingYourPicturesAccount  
ResettingYourPhone  
ResettingandLockingYourPhoneThroughSMS  
SM  
SecurityFeaturesforPCSVision  
ByusingthesecuritysettingsonyourPCSVisionPhone, youreceive  
peaceofmindwithoutsacrificingflexibility. This section will  
familiarize you with your phone’s security settings. With several  
options available, you can customize your phone to meet your  
personal needs.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
64  
Accessing the Security Menu  
All of your phone’s security settings are available through the  
Security menu. You must enter your lock code to view the  
Security menu.  
ToaccesstheSecuritymenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
.
3. Select Security and press  
4. Enter your lock code. (The Security menu is displayed.)  
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your  
Social Security number or PCS Phone Number or try 0000. If none of these work,  
call PCS Customer Solutions at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
65  
UsingYour Phone’s Lock Feature  
LockingYour Phone  
When your phone is locked, you can only receive incoming calls or  
make calls to 911, PCS Customer Solutions, or special numbers.  
Tolockyourphone:  
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on  
the previous page), select LockPhone and press  
.
2. Highlight LockNow or OnPower-up and press  
.
3. Depending on your preference, highlight either FullLock or  
Excp. Incom.Calls and press  
.
FullLock: No phone calls can be made, except for  
Emergency number,  
(PCS Customer Solutions),  
or special numbers. No phone calls can be received except  
for special numbers.  
Excp. Incom.Calls: No phone calls can be made, except for  
Emergency number,  
(PCS Customer Solutions),  
or special numbers, but all incoming calls can be received.  
Tip: If you want to cancel the “On Power-up” setting before turning the phone off,  
select Unlocked during step 2 above.  
UnlockingYour Phone  
Tounlockyourphone:  
1. Press Unlock (left softkey).  
2. Enter your lock code. (Your phone will unlock and return to  
standby mode.)  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
66  
Locking the Pictures Menu  
With this feature,you must enter your lock code when you access the  
Pictures menu.  
TolockthePicturesmenu:  
1. From the Security Menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on  
page 65), select LockPicture and press  
.
2. Select LockNow and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Unlocked during step 2  
above.  
Changing the Lock Code  
Tochangeyourlockcode:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 65), select Others and press  
.
2. Select ChangeLock and press  
.
3. Enter a new lock code, (“1234” for example) under NewCode.  
4. Reenter the new code under ReenterCode.  
Calling in Lock Mode  
You can place calls to 911, PCS Customer Solutions, and to your  
special numbers when in lock mode. (For information on special  
numbers, see “Using Special Numbers” on page 69.)  
Toplaceanoutgoingcallinlockmode:  
To call an Emergency number, special number, or PCS Customer  
Solutions, enter the phone number and press  
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
67  
Restricting Calls  
There may be occasions when you want to limit the numbers your  
phone can call or from which it can receive calls. You can use the  
Restrict Calls setting to do just that. (The Restrict Calls setting does  
not apply to 911 or PCS Customer Solutions.)  
Torestrictcalls:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 65), select Others and press  
2. Select LimitUse and press  
3. Select OutgoingCalls or IncomingCalls and press  
.
.
.
4. Select your desired option and press  
.
AllowAll lets you make or receive all calls.  
PhoneBookOnly lets you make or receive calls to or from  
Contacts entries, Voicemail, or special numbers only.  
Special#sOnly lets you make or receive calls to or from three  
special numbers only. (See “Using Special Numbers” on the  
next page.)  
Note: Restricted incoming calls are forwarded to voicemail.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
68  
Using Special Numbers  
Special numbers are important numbers that you have designated as  
being “always available.You can call and receive calls from special  
numbers even if your phone is locked.  
You can save 3 special numbers in addition to your Contacts entries  
(the same number may be in both directories).  
Toaddorreplaceaspecialnumber:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 65), select Others and press  
2. Select Special#s and press  
3. Select the box under an entry number and press  
.
.
.
4. Enter your desired phone number and press  
.
– or –  
Press Options (right softkey), select FromPhoneBook or  
Voicemail, and press  
.
5. When you have finished entering or changing your special  
numbers, press Done (left softkey).  
Toinsertpausesintoaspecialnumber:  
1. From step 4 above, enter the phone number and press Options  
(right softkey) for the options.  
2. Highlight HardPause, 2-Sec. Pause, or Hyphen and press  
.
3. Finish entering the rest of the numbers and press  
.
Erasing the Contacts Directory  
You can quickly and easily erase all of the contents of your  
Contacts Directory.  
ToeraseallthenamesandphonenumbersinyourContactsDirectory:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 65), select ErasePh. Book and press  
2. If you’re sure you want to erase your Contacts, select Yes and  
press  
.
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
69  
ErasingAll Downloads  
ToerasealldatadownloadedfromtheWeb:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 65), select EraseDownload and press  
.
2. If you’re sure you want to erase all data downloaded from the  
Web, select Yes and press  
.
If you have assigned downloaded data, the function returns  
to its default setting.  
ResettingYour PicturesAccount  
This option resets your authentication ID for your PCS Vision  
pictures account.  
Toresetyourpicturesaccount:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 65), select ResetPictures and press  
2. If you’re sure you want to reset your pictures account, select Yes  
and press  
.
.
After resetting, you are prompted to reenter the password when you  
use Online Pictures.  
Note: Your account will be locked if you enter wrong password 10 times after  
resetting your acount. In this case, please contact Sprint PCS Customer Solutions.  
ResettingYour Phone  
Resetting the phone restores all the factory defaults, including the  
ringer types and display settings. The Contacts, Call History,  
Scheduler, and Messaging are not affected.  
Toresetyourphone:  
1. From the Security Menu display (see “Accessing the Security  
Menu” on page 65), select ResetPhone and press  
2. If you’re sure you want to reset your phone, select Yes and  
press  
.
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
70  
ResettingandLockingYourPhoneThroughSMS  
When your phone is lost or stolen, you can erase your important  
personal information (such as Contacts entries, call history, and  
messages) and lock your phone by sending a special formatted SMS  
message to your phone.  
From your computer, sign on to www.sprintpcs.com and send a  
message to your phone (input your 10-digit PCS Phone Number  
followed by “@messaging.sprintpcs.com.”) in the following format:  
\ \ RESET **<Passcode>** RESET  
<Passcode> – your defined passcode.  
The default passcode is your phone’s 11-digit ESN  
(Electronic Serial Number), which is written on the  
package or on the phone itself.  
The locked phone will display the following message:  
“If found, please call PCS Customer Solutions 1-888-211-4727.”  
Toactivatethisfeature,thefollowingpresettingisrequired:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Security and press  
4. Enter your lock code.  
5. Select Others and press  
6. Select FoundMe and press  
.
.
.
.
7. Select Reset/Lock and press  
8. Select Enable and press  
.
.
To unlock a phone that has been locked through SMS, bring the  
phone to a Sprint Store.  
ChangingthePasscode  
TochangethepasscodeforthespecialformattedSMSmessages:  
1. Follow steps 1-6 above.  
2. Select ChgPasscode and press  
.
3. Enter new passcode in the box under NewPasscode (11 digits).  
4. Reenter the new passcode in the box under ReenterCode.  
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
71  
SM  
Security Features for PCSVision  
Enabling and Disabling PCSVision Services  
You can disable PCS Vision services without turning off your phone;  
however, you will not have access to all PCS Vision services,  
including Web and messaging. Disabling PCS Vision will avoid any  
charges associated with PCS Vision services. While signed out, you  
can still place or receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use other  
voice services. You may enable PCS Vision services again at any time.  
TodisablePCSVisionservices:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PCSVision and press  
.
4. Select DisableVision and press . (A message will appear.)  
5. Press Disable (right softkey) to confirm that you want to sign out.  
ToenablePCSVisionservices:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PCSVision and press  
.
4. Select EnableVision and press  
5. Press OK (left softkey) to sign in.  
.
Section 2C: Setting Your Phone’s Security  
72  
Section 2D  
Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
In This Section  
UnderstandingRoaming  
SettingYourPhone’sRoamMode  
ControllingRoamingChargesUsingCallGuard  
Roamingistheabilitytomakeorreceivecallswhenyou’reoffthe  
SprintNationwidePCSNetwork. Your new dual-band/tri-mode  
PCS Vision Phone works anywhere on the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network and allows you to roam on other analog and 1900 and  
800 MHz digital networks where we’ve implemented roaming  
agreements with other carriers.  
This section explains how roaming works as well as special features  
that let you manage your roaming experience.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
73  
Understanding Roaming  
RecognizingIconsontheDisplayScreen  
Your phone’s display screen always lets you know when you’re off  
the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network and whether your phone is  
operating in analog or digital mode. The following chart indicates  
what you’ll see depending on where you’re using your phone.  
Main LCD/Sub LCD  
Roaming Indicator  
Analog Indicator  
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network  
Other Digital Networks  
Digital Roam  
Analog Networks  
Analog Roam  
Tip: Remember, when you are using your phone off the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network, always dial numbers using 11 digits (1 + area code + number).  
Note: Unless your PCS Service Plan includes roaming, you will pay a higher  
per-minute rate for roaming calls.  
RoamingonOtherDigitalNetworks  
When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call quality and  
security will be similar to the quality you receive when making calls  
on the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. However, you may not be  
able to access certain features, such as PCS Vision.  
Note: PCS Ready Link Service is not available in roaming areas.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
74  
RoamingonAnalogNetworks  
When you roam on analog networks, you will experience a similar  
quality provided by other analog carriers today. Although some  
features, such as PCS Vision, PCS Ready Link, and PCS Voice Command,  
will be unavailable, you can still make and receive calls and access  
voicemail. If you are accustomed to PCS Service, you may notice some  
of the following differences when using analog service:  
You are more likely to experience static, cross-talk, fade-out, and  
dropped calls.  
Some features which are standard on the enhanced  
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, such as call waiting, PCS Vision,  
PCS Ready Link, and direct international dialing, may not be  
available.  
Though callers can leave voicemail messages while you are  
roaming, you may not receive notification until you return to the  
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. (See “Checking for Voicemail  
Messages While Roaming” on the next page).  
There are security and privacy risks (eavesdropping and cloning)  
that exist with conventional analog services today.  
Your battery’s charge will deplete more quickly and you will need  
to recharge it more often when you use your phone for analog  
roaming.  
Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network and  
enter an area where roaming is available (whether digital or analog), your call is  
dropped. If your call is dropped in an area where you think PCS Service is  
available, turn your phone off and on again to reconnect to the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network.  
Note: When using your phone in analog mode, the phone may feel warm. This is  
normal for analog operation.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
75  
CheckingforVoicemailMessagesWhileRoaming  
When you are roaming off the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, you  
may not receive on-phone notification of new voicemail messages.  
Callers can still leave messages, but you will need to periodically  
check your voicemail for new messages if you are in a roaming  
service area for an extended period of time.  
Tocheckyourvoicemailwhileroaming:  
Dial 1+area code+your PCS Phone Number.  
When you return to the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, voicemail  
notification will resume as normal.  
SettingYour Phone’s Roam Mode  
Your PCS Vision Phone allows you to control your roaming  
capabilities. By using the Roaming menu option, you can determine  
which signals your phone accepts.  
SetMode  
Choose from three different settings on your dual-band/tri-mode  
phone to control your roaming experience.  
Tosetyourphone’sroammode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Roaming and press  
4. Select SetMode and press  
.
.
.
5. Select an option from the following, and press  
.
Sprint allows you to access the enhanced Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network only and prevents roaming on other networks.  
Automatic seeks PCS Service. When PCS Service is  
unavailable, the phone searches for an alternate system.  
Analog forces the phone to seek an analog roaming system.  
The previous setting (Sprint or Automatic) is restored the  
next time the phone is turned on.  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
76  
ControllingRoamingChargesUsingCallGuard  
Your phone has two ways of alerting you when you are roaming off  
the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network: the onscreen roaming icon and  
Call Guard. Call Guard makes it easy to manage your roaming charges  
by requiring an extra step before you can place or answer a roaming  
call. (This additional step is not required when you make or receive  
calls while on the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.)  
ToturnCallGuardonoroff:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select Roaming and press  
4. Select CallGuard and press  
5. Select On or Off and press  
.
.
.
.
ToplaceroamingcallswithCallGuardon:  
1. From standby mode, dial 1 + area code + the seven-digit  
number. (You can also initiate a call from the Contacts directory,  
Call History, or Messaging.)  
2. Press  
or  
(or press Options (right softkey) and  
highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn) and press  
.
3. Press  
to proceed while the pop-up message is displayed.  
– or –  
Press any key to erase the pop-up message, press Options (right  
softkey), highlight RoamCall, or Roam:SpeakerOn, and press  
.
ToanswerincomingroamingcallswithCallGuardon:  
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Answer or  
Answer:Speaker, and press  
.
– or –  
1. Press  
or  
.
2. Press  
to proceed while the pop-up message is displayed.  
Reminder: If the Call Guard feature is set to On, you need to take extra steps to  
make and receive roaming calls, even if you have selected the Analog setting  
(see the previous page).  
Section 2D: Controlling Your Roaming Experience  
77  
Section 2E  
Navigating Through Menus  
In This Section  
MenuNavigation  
MenuStructure  
ViewingtheMenus  
EveryfunctionandfeatureofyourPM-8200bySanyocanbeaccessed  
throughanonscreenmenu. This section is a road map to using your  
PCS Vision Phone. Please take a few moments to learn your way  
around and you’ll find your phone easier to use.  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
78  
Menu Navigation  
The navigation key on your PCS Vision Phone allows you to scroll  
through menus quickly and easily. The scroll bar at the right of the  
menu keeps track of your position in the menu at all times.  
To navigate through a menu, simply press the navigation key up  
or down.  
Menu Structure  
SelectingMenuItems  
As you navigate through the menu, menu options are highlighted.  
Select any numbered option by simply pressing the corresponding  
number on the phone’s keypad. You may also select any item by  
highlighting it and pressing  
Forexample,ifyouwanttoviewyourlastincomingcall:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select CallHistory by pressing . (It may already be highlighted.)  
3. Select Incoming by pressing or by highlighting it and  
.
pressing . (If you have received any calls, they are displayed  
on the screen.)  
BackingUpWithinaMenu  
Togotothepreviousmenu:  
Press  
.
Toreturntostandbymode:  
Press  
.
Shortcuts  
Right navigation key to take a shortcut to the Contacts menu.  
Left navigation key to take a shortcut to the MyShortcut menu.  
(See page 56 for setting.)  
Up navigation key to take a shortcut to the Messaging menu.  
Down navigation key to take a shortcut to the Downloads menu.  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
79  
Viewing the Menus  
MenuDiagram  
The following list outlines your phone’s menu structure.  
1. Call History  
1. Outgoing  
2. Incoming  
3. Missed  
4. Erase History  
2. Contacts  
1. Find/Add Entry  
2. Speed Dial #s  
3. My Phone#  
4. Services  
3. Messaging  
1. Send Message  
2. Picture Mail  
3. Text Msg  
4. Go to Email  
5. Voicemail  
4. Web  
5. Pictures  
1. Camera  
2. My Pictures  
3. Online Albums  
4. Account Info  
6. Downloads  
1. Games  
2. Ringers  
3. Screen Savers  
4. Applications  
5. Dynamic 1-10 (If applicable)  
6. Others  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
80  
7. Settings  
1. Sounds  
1. Ringer/Key Vol.  
2. Ringer Type  
3. Alerts  
4. Receiver Vol.  
5. Others  
2. Display  
1. Backlight  
2. Greeting  
3. Font Size  
4. Background  
5. Animation  
6. Incoming Calls  
7. Match Area Code  
8. Standby Display  
9. My Buddy  
10.Sleep Mode  
3. PCS Vision  
1. Enable (or Disable) Vision  
2. Net Guard  
3. Update Profile  
4. Ready Link  
1. Enable/Disable  
2. List Update  
3. Restart R-Link  
4. R-Link Guard  
5. Ringer Type  
6. Alerts  
7. Speakerphone  
8. Default View  
5. Location  
6. Roaming  
1. Set Mode  
2. Call Guard  
7. Messaging  
1. Display Pop-up  
2. Preset Msgs  
3. Send Callback#  
8. Security  
1. Lock Phone  
2. Lock Picture  
3. Erase Ph. Book  
4. Erase Download  
5. Reset Pictures  
6. Reset Phone  
7. Others  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
81  
9. Others  
1. Any Key Answer  
2. Auto Answer  
3. Open/Close Flip  
4. Abbrev. Dial  
5. Headset Mode  
6. TTY  
7. Side Key Guard  
8. My Shortcut  
9. Airplane Mode  
10.Set Time/Date  
11.Language  
0. Phone Info  
1. Phone#/User ID  
2. Help  
3. Version  
4. Advanced  
8. Tools/Extras  
1. Calendar  
2. Alarm Clock  
3. Calculator  
4. World Clock  
5. PC Sync  
1. Ringers  
2. Images  
3. Erase Data  
9. Voice Services  
1. Voice Memo  
1. Record  
2. Play  
3. Play:Speaker  
4. Erase All  
2. Screen Call  
1. Auto  
2. Annoucement  
3. Voice Dial  
1. Program  
2. Review  
3. Review:Speaker  
4. Erase All  
Section 2E: Navigating Through Menus  
82  
Section 2F  
Managing Call History  
In This Section  
ViewingHistory  
CallHistoryOptions  
MakingaCallFromCallHistory  
SavingaPhoneNumberFromCallHistory  
PrependingaPhoneNumberFromCallHistory  
ErasingCallHistory  
TheCallHistorykeepstrackofincomingcalls, callsmadefromyour  
PCSVisionPhone, andmissedcalls. This section guides you through  
accessing and making the most of your Call History.  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
83  
Viewing History  
You’ll find the Call History feature very helpful. They are lists of the  
last 20 voice calls and the last 10 Ready Link calls that you placed,  
accepted, or missed. Call History makes redialing a number fast and  
easy. It is continually updated as new numbers are added to the  
beginning of the list and the oldest entries are removed from the  
bottom of the list.  
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and  
contact’s name (if the phone number is in your Contacts). Duplicate  
calls (same number and type of call) may only appear once on the list.  
ToviewaCallHistoryentry:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select CallHistory and press  
.
3. Select Outgoing, Incoming, or Missed and press . (The selected  
Call History list will display.)  
Tip: You can switch the Voice Call history to the PCS Ready Link call history by  
pressing R-Link (left softkey). To return to the Voice Call history, press Voice Call  
(left softkey).  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
84  
Call History Options  
For additional information and options on a particular call, highlight  
a Call History entry and press Options (right softkey).  
Call to dial the phone number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
SendMessage to send a text message. See page 195 for details.  
To send Picture Mail, see page 162.  
SavePhone# to save the phone number (if applicable). If the  
caller’s phone number is already saved in your Contacts list,  
GotoPhoneBook appears. (See “Saving a Phone Number From Call  
History” on the next page.)  
Prepend to add numbers to the beginning of the phone number.  
(See “Prepending a Phone Number From Call History” on  
page 87.)  
CopytoPersonal to copy the phone number to the Ready Link  
Personal List. (Only appears when PCS Ready Link mode is set to  
Enable and the number does not match any stored entry in your  
Personal List.)  
Erase to erase the entry.  
Making a Call From Call History  
ToplaceacallfromCallHistory:  
1. Press  
2. Select CallHistory and press  
3. Select Outgoing, Incoming or Missed and press  
4. Highlight the entry you want to call by scrolling through the list.  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
5. Press  
or  
.
– or –  
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn,  
and press  
.
Note: You cannot make calls from Call History to entries identified as No ID or  
Restricted.  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
85  
Saving a Phone Number From Call History  
Your PCS Vision Phone can store up to 500 phone numbers in up to  
300 Contacts entries (an entry may contain up to seven numbers).  
Each entry’s name can contain sixteen characters.  
TosaveaphonenumberfromCallHistory:  
1. Highlight the call history entry you want to save.  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display the options.  
3. Highlight SavePhone# and press  
4. Highlight the appropriate label (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager,  
Fax, Other, or No Label) and press  
5. Enter a name and press  
.
.
.
If you have already stored entries in the Contacts list, you are  
prompted to select the following entry mode:  
NewName to enter a name directly.  
FromPh. Book to select a name from the Contacts list.  
6. Press Save (left softkey).  
After you have saved the number, the new Contacts entry is  
displayed. (See “Contacts List Entry Options” on page 92.)  
Note: You cannot save phone numbers already in your Contacts list or from calls  
identified as No ID or Restricted. If the selected entry has already been stored in  
the Contacts list, Go to Phone Book appears during step 3 above.  
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
86  
PrependingaPhoneNumberFromCallHistory  
If you need to place a call from Call History and you happen to be  
outside your local area code, you can add the appropriate prefix by  
prepending the number.  
ToprependaphonenumberfromCallHistory:  
1. Highlight a call history entry and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight Prepend and press  
3. Enter the digits you want to add to the number.  
4. Press or to place a call.  
To select another option, press Options (right softkey), highlight it  
.
and press  
.
Call to dial the phone number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
SavePhone# to store the phone number in your Contacts  
directory.  
H
T
HardPause to insert a hard pause.  
2-Sec. Pause to insert a 2-second pause.  
Erasing Call History  
To erase individual Call History entries, see “Call History Options” on  
page 85.  
ToeraseCallHistory:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select CallHistory and press  
.
3. Select EraseHistory and press  
.
4. Select Outgoing, Incoming, Missed, or All and press  
.
5. Select VoiceCalls or ReadyLink and press  
.
VoiceCalls to erase call history for voice calls.  
ReadyLink to erase call history for PCS Ready Link calls.  
6. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2F: Managing Call History  
87  
Section 2G  
Using the Contacts Directory  
In This Section  
DisplayingtheContactsList  
AddingaNewContactsEntry  
FindingContactsListEntries  
ContactsListEntryOptions  
AddingaPhoneNumbertoaContactsEntry  
EditingaContactsEntry’sPhoneNumber  
AssigningSpeedDialNumbers  
EditingaContactsEntry  
SelectingaRinger/ImageTypeforan Entry  
SecretContactsEntries  
DialingPCSServices  
Nowthatyouknowthebasicsthatmakeiteasiertostayintouchwith  
peopleandinformation, you’rereadytoexploreyourphone’smore  
advancedfeatures. This section explains how to use your phone’s  
Contacts and helps you make the most of your contacts and time  
when you are trying to connect with the important people in  
your life.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
88  
Displaying the Contacts List  
Press the navigation key right.  
– or –  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
Adding a New Contacts Entry  
Your PCS Vision Phone can store up to 500 phone numbers in up to  
300 Contacts entries (an entry may contain up to seven numbers).  
Each entry’s name can contain sixteen characters.  
Toaddanewentry:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
.
Press the navigation key right for the shortcut (steps 1  
through 3).  
4. Highlight <AddContact> and press  
5. Enter a name and press  
6. Select a label by using your navigation key and press  
.
.
.
7. Enter the phone number or address and press  
8. Press Save (left softkey).  
– or –  
.
1. Press the navigation key right to display the Contacts list.  
2. Highlight an entry and press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight AddNewContact and press  
.
4. Follow steps 5-8 above.  
After you have saved the number, the new Contacts entry is  
displayed. (See “Contacts List Entry Options” on page 92.)  
Tip: You can also add a new Contacts entry by entering a number from standby  
mode. See “Saving a Phone Number” on page 27.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
89  
Finding Contacts List Entries  
There are several ways to display your Contacts entries: by name, by  
speed dial number, by group, and by voice dial tags. Follow the steps  
outlined in the sections below to display entries from the Contacts  
list menu.  
FindingNames  
TofindContactslistentriesbyname:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
.
Press the navigation key right for the shortcut (steps 1  
through 3).  
4. Use your navigation key to scroll through the Contacts list.  
– or –  
Enter the first letter of the name or part of the name. (The  
display shows the entries beginning with the letter entered.)  
5. Press  
to display the entry’s details.  
TofindPCSReadyLinkListentries:  
1. From standby mode, press the navigation key right to display  
your Contacts list.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey). Highlight your desired list and press  
.
PhoneBook to display the Contacts list.  
CompanyList to display the Company List.  
CompanyGroups to display the Company Group List.  
PersonalList to display the Personal List.  
PersonalGroups to display the Personal Group List.  
3. Scroll through the list to select your desired entry.  
Note: The Go to (left softkey) option does not appear when PCS Ready Link mode  
is set to Disable (see “Setting PCS Ready Link Mode” on page 133).  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
90  
FindingSpeedDialNumbers  
Tofindphonenumbersyouhavestoredinspeeddiallocations:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press . (The Speed Dial numbers list  
appears.)  
FindingVoiceDialNumbers  
TofindphonenumbersyouhavestoredinVoiceDial:  
1. Press  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
3. Select VoiceDial and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select Review or Review:Speaker and press . (The Voice Dial  
numbers list appears.)  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
91  
Contacts List Entry Options  
To access a contact’s options, display the Contacts list, highlight an  
entry and press . Then select a phone number and press Options  
(right softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Edit to edit the selected entry.  
Call to dial the selected number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone mode.  
SendMessage to send a text message. (See page 195 for details.)  
To send Picture Mail, see page 162.  
CallAlarm to set a call alarm for the entry. (See page 104 for Call  
Alarm.)  
SetSpeedDial to assign speed dial numbers to your favorite  
entries. (See “Assigning Speed Dial Numbers” on page 94.)  
SetVoiceDial to set a voice dial for the entry. (See page 124 for  
Voice Dial.)  
Prepend to alter a phone number by adding numbers to the  
beginning of the entry. (See “Prepending a Phone Number From  
Call History” on page 87.)  
CopytoPersonal to copy the phone number to your Ready Link  
Personal List. (Only appears when PCS Ready Link mode is set to  
Enable and the number does not match any stored entry in your  
Personal List.)  
ToerasetheselectedentryfromtheContactslist:  
1. From standby mode, press the navigation key right to display  
the Contacts list.  
2. Highlight the entry you wish to delete by using the navigation  
key.  
3. Press Options (right softkey).  
4. Highlight EraseContact and press  
5. Select Yes and press  
.
.
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
92  
Adding a Phone Number to a Contacts Entry  
Toaddaphonenumbertoanentry:  
1. Display a Contacts entry (see “Finding Contacts List Entries” on  
page 90).  
2. Highlight a phone number, press Options (right softkey),  
highlight Edit, and press  
.
3. Highlight the label field you want to add and press  
.
4. Enter the number and press  
.
5. Press Save (left softkey).  
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Phone Number  
Toeditanentry’sphonenumber:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Highlight the entry you wish to edit and press  
3. Highlight a phone number, press Options (right softkey),  
highlight Edit, and press  
.
.
4. Select the number you want to edit and press  
5. Edit the entry by using your keypad and press  
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save your changes.  
.
.
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
93  
Assigning Speed Dial Numbers  
With this feature you can dial Contacts Directory entries with one  
key press for locations 2-9. Save your memory locations 2-9 for speed  
dialing your most commonly used phone numbers. Speed Dial  
numbers must be stored in your Contacts to use this feature.  
TosetSpeedDial:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press  
4. To select a corresponding speed dial number from 2-9,  
highlight an unassigned number and press  
5. Select an entry from the list and press  
6. Select the phone number you want to set as a speed dial and  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
.
press  
.
– or –  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Highlight your desired entry by scrolling through the Contacts  
list and press  
.
3. Highlight the phone number you want to set as a speed dial and  
press Options (right softkey).  
4. Highlight SetSpeedDial and press  
.
5. Highlight an unassigned number and press  
.
When you highlight an assigned number and press  
,
you’ll be asked whether you want to overwrite the assigned  
number. Select Yes to overwrite or No to cancel.  
Tocancelastoredspeeddialnumber:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press  
4. Highlight the stored speed dial number you want to cancel and  
press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
5. Highlight Unassign and press  
.
TouseSpeedDial:  
From standby mode, just press and hold the appropriate key.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
94  
Editing a Contacts Entry  
Tomakechangestoanentry:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Highlight the entry you wish to edit and press  
.
3. Highlight a phone number, press Options (right softkey),  
highlight Edit, and press  
.
– or –  
Highlight an email address or Web address and press Edit (right  
softkey).  
4. Select the field you want to edit and press  
.
5. Edit the entry by using your keypad and press  
.
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save your changes.  
Selecting a Ringer/ImageType for an Entry  
You can assign a ringer or an image type to a Contacts entry so you can  
identify the caller by the ringer or image type. (See “Ringer Types” on  
page 36.)  
Toselectaringertypeforanentry:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Select the entry for which you want to set the incoming ringer  
and press  
.
3. Highlight a phone number, press Options (right softkey),  
highlight Edit, and press  
.
– or –  
Highlight an email address or Web address and press Edit (right  
softkey).  
4. Scroll to Ringer and press  
.
5. Use your navigation key to scroll through available ringers.  
(When you highlight a ringer type, a sample ringer will sound.)  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
95  
6. Highlight your desired ringer type and press  
.
RingerType to select a ringer type. Scroll through available  
ringers to hear previews.  
Ringer&Voice to notify you with Ringer and Voice.  
Vibrate to notify you by vibrating.  
Normal to set Ringer to the incoming calls setting  
(see page 36).  
None to turn the ringer type off.  
Downloads to set a downloaded image saved in your phone.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download.  
7. Press Save (left softkey) to save the ringer type.  
To confirm the ringer, highlight Ringer and press Play (right  
softkey).  
Toselectanimagetypeforanentry:  
1. Follow steps 1-3 on the previous page.  
2. Scroll to PictureID and press  
.
3. Select a menu by scrolling up or down and press  
.
4. Highlight your desired image type and press  
.
Normal to set Image to the incoming calls setting  
(see page 47).  
None to turn the image type off.  
Downloads to set a downloaded image saved in your phone.  
GetNew to start up the browser so you can select an item to  
download.  
InCamera to set a picture saved in your In Camera folder.  
SavedtoPh. to set a picture saved in your Saved to Phone  
folder.  
5. Press Save (left softkey) to save the image type.  
To see a display preview of an image, press Preview (right  
softkey) during step 5 above. Press the right softkey to  
switch between Main/Sub LCD’s display preview.  
Note: If you set an animation ringer (indicated with  
icon) and an image, your  
PCS Phone plays the ringer (audio) of the animation ringer and displays the  
image you selected.  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
96  
Secret Contacts Entries  
You can hide an entry’s phone number(s) and require your lock code  
to edit the entry by making it secret. The entry name is still displayed,  
but the entry’s phone numbers are replaced with “(Secret)”.  
Tomakeanentrysecret:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the Contacts entry you want to tag secret.  
3. Press Options (right softkey) to display the menu options.  
4. Highlight SetSecret and press  
.
5. Enter the 4-digit lock code.  
6. Select On and press  
.
Tomakeanentrypublic:  
1. Press the navigation key right.  
2. Scroll to the Contacts entry you want to tag public.  
3. Press Options (right softkey) to display the menu options.  
4. Highlight SetSecret and press  
.
5. Enter the 4-digit lock code.  
6. Select Off and press  
.
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your  
Social Security number or your PCS Phone Number or try 0000.  
If none of these work, call PCS Customer Solutions at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).  
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
97  
Dialing PCS Services  
Your Contacts list is preprogrammed with contact numbers for various  
PCS Services. You must be in digital mode to access PCS Services.  
Todialaservice:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
.
.
3. Select Services and press  
4. Select CustSolutions, DirAssistance, AccountInfo, SprintOperator,  
or VoiceCommand and press  
.
5. Press  
or  
.
– or –  
Press Options (right softkey), highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn,  
and press  
.
Section 2G: Using the Contacts Directory  
98  
Section 2H  
Personal Organizer  
In This Section  
ManagingtheScheduler  
UsingYourPhone’sScheduler  
AddingaCallAlarmtotheScheduler  
AddingToDoListItems  
PurgingAllEvents, CallAlarms, orToDoListItems  
PersonalInformationManagement  
UsingYourPhone’sTools  
DownloadingFilesThroughPCSVision  
YourPCSVisionPhoneisequippedwithseveralpersonalinformation  
managementfeaturesthathelpyoumanageyourbusylifestyle.  
This section shows you how to use these features to turn your  
phone into a time management planner that helps you keep up  
with your contacts, schedules, and commitments. It takes  
productivity to a whole new level.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
99  
Managing the Scheduler  
Calendar  
Use the Calendar to remind you of events or important calls you need  
to make. You can schedule up to 100 events, 15 Call Alarms, and  
20 To-Do List items.  
SettingtheTime/Date  
In a no-service area or an analog service area, it’s necessary to set the  
actual time and date to use the Calendar function. Set the current  
Time/Date by using numeric keys and/or the navigation key  
(Right/Left: move cursor, Up/Down: change value). To display the  
time setting mode, press , select Tools/Extras and press  
Then select Calendar and press  
.
.
You can set any time from 12:00 AM, Jan 1, 2000 to 11:59 PM,  
Dec 31, 2099.  
SettingHolidays  
You can set your personal holidays by displaying the date in red on  
the Calendar display. The default holidays displayed in red are  
Sundays and national holidays.  
Note: You can set holidays from Jan 1, 2000 to Dec 31, 2020.  
Tosetpersonalholidays:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
3. Select Calendar and press  
.
4. Highlight the day you want to set to the holiday by using the  
navigation key (Left: previous day, Right: next day, Up: previous  
week, Down: next week,  
: previous/next month).  
5. Press Options (right softkey), highlight Holiday, and press  
.
6. Highlight SetDate or SetWeekly from the options and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
100  
Options:  
SetDate sets the selected date for the holiday.  
SetWeekly sets weekly holidays.  
ResetDate resets the holiday setting for the selected date.  
ResetWeekly resets the weekly holiday setting.  
ResetAll resets all the holiday settings and returns to the default  
settings.  
7. If you selected SetWeekly, ResetWeekly, or ResetAll, you’ll be  
prompted to select Yes or No.  
Tip: The current day is framed by a rectangle.  
UsingYour Phone’s Scheduler  
Adding an Event to the Scheduler  
Your Scheduler helps organize your time and reminds you of  
important events (up to 100 events).  
Toaddanevent:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
3. Select Calendar and press  
.
4. Select the day you want to add an event to by using the  
navigation key and press  
.
5. Press Options (right softkey) to display the options.  
6. Select AddEvent and press  
.
7. Select Schedule and press  
.
8. Enter the description using your keypad, and press  
press Mode [right softkey] to select a description from  
“From To Do List”).  
(or  
Note: The “From To Do List ”option will not appear if there are no items stored in  
the To Do List. See “Adding To Do List Items” on page 107 for details.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
101  
9. Select the menu under the following options and press  
.
Description to enter a description of your event (up to 14  
characters).  
From to schedule the start time.  
To to schedule the end time.  
Location to edit the location of your event (up to 14  
characters).  
Alarm to select your desired ringer.  
AlarmTime to edit the alarm time (number of hours or  
minutes before the event starts). Default alarm time is 10  
minutes before.  
Repeat to set the event’s repeating status. Select None, Daily,  
Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.  
10. Press Save (left softkey) to schedule the event.  
Tip: The date you have scheduled events for is indicated by “ ”.  
Tip: Press the navigation key up or down to scroll by week through the Scheduler  
calendar and the Side Volume key to scroll by month.  
Event Alerts  
There are several ways your PCS Vision Phone alerts you of scheduled  
events:  
By playing the alert tone (depending on the Ringer Type and  
Ringer Volume setting).  
By blinking the LED.  
By displaying the event’s description on the Main LCD when the  
flip is open.  
By displaying the event’s description on the Sub LCD when the  
flip is closed.  
By lighting the LCD backlight (depending on the backlight setting).  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
102  
EventAlert Menu  
When your phone is turned on and you have an event alarm  
scheduled, your phone alerts you and displays the event summary.  
Torespondtoaneventalert:  
1. Press  
or View (left softkey) to silence the alarm and see the  
event details.  
2. Highlight the unchecked event and press  
to see the event  
details or press Options (right softkey) for the following options.  
To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Snooze to repeat the alarm in ten minutes.  
Exit to exit the options.  
Note: If you press Exit (left softkey) during step 2 above, you are prompted to  
erase the unchecked event. Select Yes to erase or No to cancel.  
Viewing Events  
Toviewyourscheduledevents:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
3. Select Calendar and press  
.
4. Select the date for which you set events and press . (The  
selected day’s events list will display.)  
Erasing a Day’s Events or CallAlarms  
Toeraseascheduledday’seventsorcallalarms:  
1. From the Event list display (see above), highlight one of the  
events or call alarms and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight EraseEvent and press  
.
3. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
103  
Adding a CallAlarm to the Scheduler  
You can set call alarms to notify you when you need to place a call.  
The call alarm will let you know when and to whom to place a  
scheduled call. You can set up to 15 call alarms.  
ToaddacallalarmtotheScheduler:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
3. Select Calendar and press  
.
4. Select the day you want to add a call alarm to by using the  
navigation key and press  
.
5. From the event list display, press Options (right softkey) to  
display the options.  
6. Select AddEvent and press  
.
7. Select CallAlarm and press  
.
8. Enter the phone number directly or press Options (right softkey)  
for options.  
FromPhoneBook to select the desired number from your  
Contacts list.  
Voicemail to select the number for voicemail access.  
9. Select the box under the following items and press  
.
Time/Date to edit the start time/date.  
Alarm to select the ringer alarm.  
Repeat to set the Call Alarm’s repeat status. Select None,  
Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly.  
10. Press Save (left softkey).  
Tip: You can also add a call alarm from the Contacts menu (see “Contacts List  
Entry Options” on page 92).  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
104  
CallAlarm Alerts  
There are several ways your PCS Phone alerts you of a scheduled call  
alarm:  
By playing the alert tone (depending on the Ringer Type and  
Ringer Volume setting).  
By blinking the LED.  
By displaying the call alarm notification on the Main LCD when  
the flip is open.  
By displaying the call alarm notification on the Sub LCD when the  
flip is closed.  
By lighting the LCD backlight (depending on the backlight setting).  
CallAlarm Menu  
When your phone is turned on and you have scheduled a call alarm,  
your phone alerts you and displays the name or phone number you  
wish to call.  
Torespondtoacallalarm:  
1. Press  
or View (left softkey) to silence the alarm and see the  
call alarm details.  
2. Highlight the unchecked event and press  
to see the call  
alarm details, or press Options (right softkey) for the following  
options (to select an option, highlight it and press ):  
Call to dial the scheduled phone number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the scheduled phone number in  
speakerphone mode.  
Snooze to repeat the alarm in ten minutes.  
SavePhone# to save the scheduled phone number in your  
Contacts list. GotoPhoneBook appears when the number is  
already in your Contacts list. (See “Saving a Phone Number”  
on page 27.)  
Note: If you press Exit (left softkey) during step 2 above, you are prompted to  
erase the unchecked event. Select Yes to erase or No to cancel.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
105  
Editing a CallAlarm  
Toeditacallalarm:  
1. From the Event list display (see page 103), highlight one of the  
call alarms and press . (The call alarm details appear.)  
2. Select the box you want to edit and press  
3. Enter or select a new setting and press  
4. Press Save (left softkey).  
.
.
Viewing a Future/Past Day’s Scheduled Events  
Toviewafuture/pastday’sscheduledevents:  
1. From the Event list display (see page 103), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight GoToDate and press  
.
3. Enter the date by using numeric keys and the navigation key  
and press  
4. Press  
or OK (left softkey).  
once again to view the day’s Event list.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
106  
Adding To Do List Items  
Your phone can store and manage up to 20 To Do List items.  
ToaddanitemtoyourToDoList:  
1. From the Event list display (see page 103), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight ToDoList and press  
3. Press Options (right softkey).  
4. Highlight AddItem and press  
.
.
5. Enter the description (up to 14 characters) and press  
.
6. Select the menu under Priority and press to edit the To Do’s  
priority. You can select from Normal, !Urgent, or Done.  
7. Press Save (left softkey).  
Viewing theTo Do List  
ToviewyourToDoList:  
1. From the Event list display (see page 103), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight ToDoList and press  
.
To see the details of each To Do List item, select an item and  
press  
.
EditingTo Do List Items  
ToeditaToDoListitem:  
1. From the To Do List display, highlight the item you want to edit  
and press  
.
2. Highlight the box you want to edit and press  
.
3. Edit the description or change the priority and press  
.
4. Press Save (left softkey).  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
107  
Adding aTo Do List Item to the Schedule  
ToaddyourToDoListitemtotheschedule:  
1. From the To Do List display, highlight the item you want to add  
to the schedule and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight AddToSchedule and press  
.
AddToSchedule to extract the item from the To Do List and  
make it a scheduled event.  
3. Enter the description using your keypad and press . (See  
“Adding an Event to the Scheduler” on page 101 for entering.)  
4. Press Save (left softkey).  
Deleting Items From theTo Do List  
TodeleteToDoListitems:  
1. From the To Do List display (see the previous page), highlight  
the item you want to erase and press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight your desired option and press  
.
EraseItem erases an item from the To Do List.  
EraseSelection erases multiple selected To Do List items at  
one time. Press  
to check the box(es) next to the To Do  
List item(s) you want to delete and press Erase (left softkey)  
to erase. To check all boxes, press Options (right softkey),  
highlight CheckAll, and press  
.
EraseAll erases all To Do List items.  
3. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
108  
Viewing Memory inYour Scheduler  
Toviewavailablememoryspaceandoptions:  
1. From the Event list display (see page 103), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight ViewMemory and press  
.
3. Highlight Schedule, CallAlarm, or ToDoList and press . (The  
available memory space and options display.)  
For further options:  
4. Press Options (right softkey).  
5. Highlight an option and press  
.
EraseOld deletes old events or call alarms.  
EraseSelection deletes the To Do List items you selected.  
(See “Deleting Items From the To Do List ” on the  
previous page.)  
EraseDone deletes the To Do List items that have been  
completed.  
EraseAll deletes all events, call alarms, or To Do List items.  
6. Select Yes or No and press  
.
PurgingAll Events,CallAlarms,or  
To Do List Items  
Todeleteallscheduledevents,callalarms,orToDoListitems:  
1. From the Event list display (see page 103), press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight EraseMemory and press  
.
3. Highlight one item from the options and press  
.
EraseOld deletes old events, call alarms, and To Do List items  
that are done.  
EraseAll deletes all events, call alarms, and To Do List items.  
4. Select Yes or No and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
109  
Personal Information Management  
DisplayingYour UserAddress  
Todisplaythephone’scurrentuseraddress:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
.
4. Select Phone#/UserID and press  
.
If you sign out, <PCS Vision Disabled> appears on the display.  
Finding Icon Definitions  
Toviewanexplanationoficonsthatappearonthedisplay:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
.
4. Select Help and press  
.
5. Select the item for which you want to see the explanation and  
press . (The icon’s explanation appears.)  
6. Press Done (left softkey) or  
to end.  
Tip: Press the navigation key up or down to scroll the message manually.  
Displaying the Version Information  
Todisplaytheversionnumberofthesoftware,hardware,PRL  
(PreferredRoamingList),PRI(ProductReleaseInstructions),etc.,  
installedonyourPCSPhone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
4. Select Version and press  
.
.
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
110  
Displaying Advanced Information  
Todisplayadvancedinformationsuchastechnologyandfrequency:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select PhoneInfo and press  
4. Select Advanced and press  
.
.
.
UsingYour Phone’sTools  
In addition to helping you be more efficient and organized, your  
PCS Vision Phone offers useful and entertaining tools.  
Using the Alarm Clock  
Your phone comes with a built-in alarm clock with alarm capabilities.  
Tousethealarmclock:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
.
3. Select AlarmClock and press  
4. A caution message will appear on the display. Press Continue  
(left softkey) to continue.  
5. Select the box under the following items and press  
.
Alarm to set the alarm On/Off. Select On and press  
.
Time to enter the alarm time. Enter the desired alarm time  
and press  
.
Repeat to select the alarm frequency. Select None to set your  
alarm once or Daily to set your alarm daily.  
6. Press Done (left softkey) to save the alarm settings.  
Note: Alarm will not sound when the phone is powered off.  
Tostopthealarm:  
Press any key to stop the alarm.  
Press Exit (right softkey) to exit the alarm clock display.  
Tip: The alarm stops in 30 seconds automatically.  
Note: You can adjust the ringer type and ringer volume in your Settings menu.  
To change the ringer type, see “Selecting Ringer Types for Calendar” on page 39.  
To change the ringer volume, see “Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings” on  
page 41.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
111  
Using the Calculator  
Your phone comes with a built-in calculator.  
Tousethecalculator:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
3. Select Calculator and press  
.
4. Enter numbers using your keypad. Press the left softkey to  
insert a decimal point.  
5. Press the appropriate navigation key for an arithmetic option  
(Up for addition, Down for subtraction, Left for multiplication,  
Right for division).  
6. Enter numbers and press  
for the result.  
To clear the numbers, press CLR (right softkey).  
To exit the Calculator, press  
.
Using the World Clock  
This feature is available only in digital service areas.  
Tosettheworldclockdisplay:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Tools/Extras and press  
.
.
3. Select WorldClock and press  
4. The world clock display appears.  
Press the navigation key right or left to change countries.  
Press Summer (left softkey) or Standard (right softkey) to select  
between daylight savings and standard time (if applicable). “ ” is  
shown in summer mode.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
112  
Downloading FilesThrough PCSVision  
Your PCS Phone allows you to download images (screen savers),  
ringers, games, etc., from a PCS Vision connection. It is also possible  
to download from certain menus (Contacts list, Ringer Setting, or  
Display Setting).  
TodownloadafilefromtheWeb:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select your desired data folder (for example, Games, Ringers,  
Screen Saver, or Applications) and press  
4. Select GetNew and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
5. Select your desired file and follow the system prompts.  
6. Press the left softkey to start downloading.  
7. Wait for the download to complete.  
8. Press  
operation.  
to end or press the right or left softkey for further  
Rightsoftkey returns to the Download page and you can  
continue to download.  
Leftsoftkey assigns the downloaded data. (See “Confirming  
the Downloaded Data” on page 117.)  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
113  
TodownloadafilefromaContactslistentry:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
4. Select the entry for which you want to set the downloaded  
ringer or image and press  
5. Highlight a phone number and press Options (right softkey).  
.
.
.
Then highlight Edit and press  
.
– or –  
Highlight an email address or Web address, then press Edit (right  
softkey).  
6. Scroll to Ringer or PictureID and press  
.
7. Highlight GetNew and press . (The browser launches and  
displays the Download page.)  
8. Select your desired image or ringer file and follow the system  
prompts.  
9. Press the left softkey to start downloading.  
10. Wait for the download to complete.  
11. Press  
operation.  
to end or press the right or left softkey for further  
Rightsoftkey returns to the Download page and you can  
continue to download.  
Leftsoftkey assigns the downloaded data. (See “To confirm  
the downloaded ringers folder” on page 117 or “To confirm  
the downloaded images [screen savers] folder” on  
page 118.)  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
114  
TodownloadaringerfilefromtheRingerSettingMenu(RingerType  
andStart-up/Power-offTone):  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Sounds and press  
.
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
5. Select one item from VoiceCalls, Voicemail, Messaging, or  
Calendar, and press . The following item requires an extra step:  
For VoiceCalls, select the menu under WithCallerID or  
NoCallerID.  
6. Select the menu under each item and press  
.
7. Select GetNew and press . (The browser launches and  
displays the Download page.)  
8. Select your desired ringer file and follow the system prompts.  
9. Press the left softkey to start downloading.  
10. Wait for the download to complete.  
11. Press  
operation.  
to end or press the right or left softkey for further  
Rightsoftkey returns to the Download page and you can  
continue to download.  
Leftsoftkey assigns the downloaded data. (See “To confirm  
the downloaded ringers folder” on page 117.)  
TodownloadaringerfilefromtheStart-up/Power-offTonemenu:  
1. Select Others during step 4 above and press  
2. Select the menu under Start-upTone or Power-offTone and  
press  
.
.
3. Follow the previous steps 7 to 11.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
115  
TodownloadanimagefilefromtheDisplaySettingMenu  
(Animation,IncomingCalls,andScreenSaver):  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select Display and press  
.
4. Select Animation or IncomingCalls and press  
.
The following item requires an extra step:  
For Animation, select the menu under Standby, OutgoingCalls,  
or ServiceSearch.  
5. Select the menu under each item and press  
.
6. Select GetNew and press . (The browser launches and  
displays the Download page.)  
7. Select your desired image file and follow the system prompts.  
8. Press the left softkey to start downloading.  
9. Wait for the download to complete.  
10. Press  
operation.  
to end or press the right or left softkey for further  
Rightsoftkey returns to the Download page and you can  
continue to download.  
Leftsoftkey assigns the downloaded data. (See “To confirm  
the downloaded images [screen savers] folder” on page 118.)  
TodownloadanimagefilefromtheScreenSavermenu:  
1. Select StandbyDisplay during step 4 above and press  
.
2. Select ScreenSaver and press  
.
3. Select the menu under ScreenSaver and press  
.
4. Follow the previous steps 6 to 10.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
116  
Confirming the Downloaded Data  
The downloaded data will be classified as games, ringers, images  
(screen savers), or applications automatically. However, if any data  
has a different category, it is classified as Dynamic. If data doesn’t  
belong to any of the above, it is classified as Others.  
Toconfirmthedownloadedgamesfolder:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select Games and press  
4. Select the downloaded game you want to confirm and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
5. Select Run from the options and press  
.
Options:  
Run to play the downloaded game.  
Settings to set the Network Access availability.  
Options to select the options of the downloaded game.  
Properties shows the downloaded game properties.  
OnlineInfo shows the downloaded game online information (if  
applicable).  
Shop allows you to continue downloading (if applicable).  
Logo/Trademark displays logo and description.  
Erase erases the selected downloaded game.  
Exit to return to the downloaded data list display.  
Toconfirmthedownloadedringersfolder:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select Ringers and press  
4. Select the downloaded ringer you want to confirm and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Play from the options and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
117  
Options:  
Play to play the downloaded ringer.  
Assign to assign the downloaded ringer to the Voice Calls,  
Voicemail, Messaging, Calendar, Start-up/Power-off Tone, or  
Phone Book.  
Options to select the options of the downloaded ringer.  
Properties shows the downloaded ringer properties.  
OnlineInfo shows the downloaded ringer online information (if  
applicable).  
Shop allows you to continue downloading (if applicable).  
Erase erases the selected downloaded ringer.  
Exit to return to the downloaded data list display.  
Toconfirmthedownloadedimages(screensavers)folder:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Select ScreenSavers and press  
.
4. Select the downloaded image you want to confirm and press  
.
5. Select View from the options and press  
.
Options:  
View to display the downloaded image.  
Assign to assign the downloaded image to the Incoming Calls,  
Screen Saver, or Phone Book.  
Options to select the options of the downloaded image.  
Properties shows the downloaded image properties.  
OnlineInfo shows the downloaded image online information (if  
applicable).  
Shop allows you to continue downloading (if applicable).  
Erase erases the selected downloaded image.  
Exit to return to the downloaded data list display.  
Note: Depending on the data, you can select where to assign your downloaded  
files: Image data can be assigned to Incoming Calls, Screen Saver, or Phone Book.  
Animation data can be assigned to Standby, Outgoing Calls, or Service Search.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
118  
Toconfirmthedownloadedapplicationsfolder:  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Select Applications and press  
.
4. Select the downloaded application you want to confirm and  
press  
.
5. Select Run from the options and press  
.
Options:  
Run to play the downloaded application.  
Settings to set the Network Access availability.  
Options to select the options of the downloaded application.  
Properties shows the downloaded application properties.  
OnlineInfo shows the downloaded application online  
information (if applicable).  
Shop allows you to continue downloading (if applicable).  
Logo/Trademark displays logo and description.  
Erase erases the selected downloaded application.  
Exit to return to the downloaded data list display.  
ToconfirmthedownloadedDynamicfolder:  
The downloaded data in the Dynamic folder are varied (options  
subject to change).  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select Dynamic-(1to10) and press  
4. Select the downloaded data you want to confirm and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
5. Select Open from the options and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
119  
Options:  
Open to play the downloaded content.  
Options to select the options of the downloaded data.  
Properties shows the downloaded data properties.  
OnlineInfo shows the downloaded data online information (if  
applicable).  
Shop allows you to continue downloading (if applicable).  
Logo/Trademark displays logo and description (if applicable).  
Erase erases the selected downloaded data.  
Exit to return to the downloaded data list display.  
ToconfirmthedownloadedOthersfolder:  
The downloaded data in the Others folder are varied (options subject  
to change).  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select Others and press  
4. Select the downloaded data you want to confirm and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
5. Select Open from the options and press  
.
Options:  
Open to play the downloaded content.  
Options to select the options of the downloaded data.  
Properties shows the downloaded data properties.  
OnlineInfo shows the downloaded data online information (if  
applicable).  
Shop allows you to continue downloading (if applicable).  
Logo/Trademark displays logo and description (if applicable).  
Erase erases the selected downloaded data.  
Exit to return to the downloaded data list display.  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
120  
IconIndication  
Type Item  
Icon (appears at the left side  
of the downloaded data)  
From Web Ringers (~128KB)  
Voice (~128KB)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(New Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
(Assigned Data)  
Screen Savers/Images (~128KB)  
Animation (~128KB)  
Animation Ringer (~128KB)  
Game (~128KB)  
Application (~128KB)  
Unknown type (~128KB)  
Note: Download icon subject to change  
SortingtheDownloadedData  
Files downloaded via the Web are stored in alphabetical order. You  
may also store the data in memory size order.  
Tosortdownloadedfiles:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Select one of each folder that includes the downloaded data you  
want to sort.  
4. Press  
.
5. Press Options (right softkey).  
6. Highlight Sorting from the options and press  
.
Sorting to sort the downloaded data in alphabetical (Name)  
or memory size (Size) order.  
Icon/Size to show the downloaded data list with memory size.  
EraseAll to erase all downloaded files you selected during  
step 3. (Downloaded data that has already been assigned  
cannot be erased.)  
7. Highlight Name or Size and press  
.
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
121  
Viewing the Downloaded Data Size  
This feature allows you to confirm each downloaded file’s size and  
the remaining download capacity.  
Toviewthedatasize:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select one of each folder that includes the downloaded data you  
to access the main menu.  
.
want to confirm and press  
.
4. Press Options (right softkey).  
5. Highlight Icon/Size and press . (Data size is displayed at the  
left of the downloaded data name.)  
ViewingtheMemorySpaceAvailableforDownloads  
This feature allows you to confirm how much memory is left and may  
be used for downloading files.  
Toviewtheavailablememoryspace:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Press Options (right softkey).  
4. Highlight ViewMemory and press . (Used and Free memory  
size are displayed.)  
ErasingOldDownloadedData  
If you try to download new data when the downloaded data’s  
memory is full, a warning message appears and you will be prompted  
to erase some old downloaded data.  
Toerasedownloadeddata:  
1. When the warning message appears, press Erase (left softkey)  
to make a space for new download data. (Press the right softkey  
to cancel the download.)  
2. Select one of each folder that includes the data you want to  
erase and press  
.
3. Select the data you want to erase and press Erase (left softkey).  
4. Select Yes and press . (You can now continue to download  
the new file.)  
Section 2H: Personal Organizer  
122  
Section 2I  
Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
In This Section  
UsingVoice-ActivatedDialing  
ManagingVoiceMemos  
SettingUpScreenCall  
YourPCSVisionPhone’sVoiceServicesletyouplacecallsusingyour  
voice, storevoicereminders, andrecordmemosrightonyourphone.  
This section includes easy-to-follow instructions on using voice-  
activated dialing and managing voice memos.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
123  
Using Voice-Activated Dialing  
SM  
In addition to PCS Voice Command (see page 223), you can use a  
voice dial tag to automatically dial a phone number in your Contacts.  
(A voice dial tag is a command you record and use to place calls  
without using the keypad.) Your phone can store up to 30 voice dial  
tags. (To create a voice dial tag, see “Adding a New Contacts Entry” on  
page 89 or “Editing a Contacts Entry’s Phone Number” on page 93.)  
Making a Call UsingVoice-Activated Dialing  
Touseavoicedialtagtocallaphonenumber:  
With the flip open:  
1. Press  
or  
briefly.  
2. Follow the voice prompts and recite the entry’s Voice Dial tag  
into your phone’s microphone.  
With the flip closed:  
1. Press and hold  
.
2. Follow the voice prompts and recite the entry’s Voice Dial tag  
into your phone’s microphone.  
Note: To use the Voice Dial function, you must have a stored entries for Voice Dial  
(see “Programming Voice Dial Tags” below).  
Programming Voice DialTags  
Toprogramavoicedialtag:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceDial and press  
.
4. Select Program and press  
.
5. The phone will prompt you to say the name you want to  
program. Wait for the beep and then say the name.  
6. Respond to the prompt by repeating the name after the beep.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
124  
7. Enter or highlight the Voice Dial entry (name) in the Contacts  
list and press  
.
8. Select the labeled category that includes your desired phone  
number and press . (The display shows “Voice Dial  
Recorded.”)  
Note: Record Voice Dial tags in a quiet environment and without the aid of an  
accessory (for example, a headset or hands-free car kit).  
ReviewingVoice DialTags  
Toreviewvoicedialtags:  
1. Press  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
3. Select VoiceDial and press  
4. Select Review or Review:Speaker and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
5. Select the desired entry and press  
.
– or –  
Select the desired entry and press Options (right softkey). To  
select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Options:  
Play to play the recorded voice dial tag.  
SpeakerOn to play the recorded voice dial tag in speakerphone  
mode. (If you are in speakerphone mode, the option will appear  
as SpeakerOff to deactivate.)  
Erase to erase the voice dial tag. Select Yes to erase and No to cancel.  
ErasingAllVoice DialTags  
Toeraseallvoicedialtags:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceDial and press  
.
4. Select EraseAll and press  
.
5. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
125  
Managing Voice Memos  
You can use your phone’s Voice Services to record brief memos to  
remind you of important events, phone numbers, or grocery list items.  
Tip: If you haven’t signed up for the PCS Ready Link service and PCS Ready Link  
mode is set to Disable, you can use the Ready Link (Memo) Button (  
) as a  
Voice Memo button in standby mode. You can use it to record memos or display  
Memo options.  
RecordingVoice Memos  
Torecordavoicememo:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
4. Select Record and press  
.
5. Start recording after the beep.  
Toendtherecordingofyourmemo:  
Press  
,
, or  
.
Tip: Recording terminates automatically after 18 seconds.  
Tip: To record in speakerphone mode, press and hold  
in standby mode.  
Torecordaconversationduringaphonecall:  
1. During a call, press  
to see the options.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
4. Select Record and press  
.
5. Start recording after the beep.  
Toendtherecordingofyourconversation:  
Press  
– or –  
Press  
or  
while recording.  
to stop recording and disconnect the call.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
126  
Recording also stops when the other party hangs up the call.  
Memo recording is disabled while you are roaming in analog  
service areas.  
When the recording capacity is full, highlight an old memo, and  
press Erase (left softkey). Then select Yes and press  
to make  
room for additional memos.  
Note: Your phone can store up to 12 memos and the total available recording time  
is 72 seconds (maximum of 18 seconds per memo).  
Tip: Voice Memos are stored with the date and time stamp in reverse  
chronological order, except when recorded in a no service area.  
Voice Memo Options  
Toplaythevoicememosyouhaverecorded:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
4. Select Play or Play:Speaker and press  
.
5. Select one memo from the list and press  
.
– or –  
If you want to play all memos continuously, highlight All and  
press  
.
6. Press  
to stop playing.  
Press Slow (left softkey) or Fast (right softkey) to change the  
playing speed.  
To play the newer/older memo, press the navigation key  
right or left.  
Tip: To set the speakerphone mode on or off, press Options (right softkey),  
highlight Speaker On/Off, and press during step 5 above.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
127  
ErasingVoice Memos  
Toeraseallvoicememos:  
1. Follow steps 1-4 on the previous page.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
3. Select EraseAll and press  
.
4. Select Yes and press  
.
– or –  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
4. Select EraseAll and press  
.
5. Select Yes and press  
.
Toeraseindividualmemos:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select VoiceMemo and press  
.
4. Select Play or Play:Speaker and press  
.
5. Display the memo list, highlight the memo you want to erase,  
and press Options (right softkey).  
6. Select Erase and press  
.
7. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
128  
Setting Up Screen Call  
This feature enables you to screen incoming calls by using a recorded  
announcement, either one that is pre-recorded or one that you record.  
You can also record the caller’s message into the Voice Memo list.  
To listen to the message, see “Voice Memo Options” on page 127.  
Activating Screen Call  
TostartScreenCallwhenyouhaveincomingcalls:  
1. When the phone rings or vibrates, press Options (right softkey)  
to display the options.  
2. Highlight ScreenCall and press  
.
TosetAutoScreenCall:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
4. Select Auto and press  
.
5. Select On and press  
.
6. Set the answering time by using numeric keys or by pressing the  
navigation key up or down.  
7. Press  
or OK (left softkey). (The icon is displayed on the  
standby display.)  
Tip: If a new caller’s message is waiting, appears on the display. The memos  
recorded while activating “Screen Call” are shown with “” or “!” icon in the list  
(“”: once played, “!”: not played yet).  
Tip: While the caller’s message is being recorded: Pressing  
and disconnects the call, pressing answers the call.  
stops recording  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
129  
Selecting anAnnouncement for Screen Call  
ToselectaScreenCallannouncement:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
4. Select Announcement and press  
5. Depending on your preference, highlight Pre-Recorded or  
Custom and press  
.
.
RecordingYourNameforaPre-RecordedAnnouncement  
You can use a pre-recorded announcement with or without your  
name. If you record your name, your phone uses your name to  
announce that you are not available to answer the call.  
Torecordyourname:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
4. Select Announcement and press  
.
5. Select Pre-Recorded and press Edit (right softkey).  
6. Select RecordName and press  
.
If your name has already been recorded, select Yes or No to  
overwrite the existing recording.  
7. Press  
to start the first recording. (Press  
to stop recording.)  
8. After the first recording, press  
again to start the second  
recording.  
9. Press  
to stop recording.  
Tip: Recording terminates automatically after 12 seconds.  
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
130  
Recording a CustomizedAnnouncement  
Torecordanannouncement:  
1. Follow steps 1-4 on the previous page.  
2. Select Custom and press Edit (right softkey).  
3. Highlight Record and press  
.
When an announcement has already been recorded, select  
Yes or No to overwrite the existing recording.  
4. Press  
to start the first recording. (Press  
to stop recording.)  
5. After the first recording, press  
again to start the second  
recording.  
6. Press  
to stop recording.  
Tip: Recording terminates automatically after 12 seconds.  
Reviewing anAnnouncement  
Toreviewanannouncement:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select VoiceServices and press  
.
3. Select ScreenCall and press  
.
4. Select Announcement and press  
.
5. Select Pre-Recorded or Custom and press Edit (right softkey).  
6. Highlight Play or Play:Speaker and press  
.
Erasing anAnnouncement  
Toeraseanannouncement:  
1. Follow steps 1-5 above.  
2. Select EraseName to erase the name for a Pre-Recorded  
announcement and press  
.
– or –  
Select Erase to erase the message for a Custom announcement  
and press  
.
3. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 2I: Using Your Phone’s Voice Services  
131  
Section 2J  
Using PCS Ready Link  
In This Section  
GettingStartedWithPCSReadyLink  
MakingandReceivingaPCSReadyLinkCall  
AddingandEditingReadyLinkContacts  
ErasingReadyLinkListEntries  
UpdatingYourPCSReadyLinkLists  
ManagingPCSReadyLinkSettings  
YourPCSVisionReadyLinkPhonegivesyoutheabilitytoquicklyconnect  
withotherPCSReadyLinkusersforwalkie-talkie-stylecommunication  
fromanywhere, toanywhereontheSprintNationwidePCSNetwork.  
It’s ideal for quick two-way conversations with your friends, family,  
and co-workers.  
This section explains the features and options of your PCS Vision  
Ready Link Phone.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
132  
Getting StartedWith PCS Ready Link  
PCS Ready Link allows you to enjoy quick, two-way, walkie-talkie-style”  
communication with your friends, family, and co-workers. You can  
make 1-to-1 or 1-to-many calls (up to 5 others on the same call) to any  
other PCS Ready Link user, anywhere on the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network. You can make and receive PCS Ready Link calls when  
your phone displays  
.
Setting PCS Ready Link Mode  
ToenableordisablePCSReadyLinkmode:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select Enable/Disable and press  
.
5. Select Enable and press . (The default setting is Disable.)  
Enable: Lets you make or receive PCS Ready Link calls any  
time your phone is not in use.  
Disable: Disables your phone’s PCS Ready Link service; you  
will not be able to make or receive PCS Ready Link calls or  
access your Ready Link contacts.  
Tip: If you haven’t signed up for the PCS Ready Link service and PCS Ready Link  
mode is set to Disable, you can use the Ready Link (Memo) Button (  
Voice Memo button in standby mode.  
) as a  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
133  
PreparingYour Phone for PCS Ready Link Service  
The first time you use your PCS Vision Ready Link Phone, your phone  
must identify itself and make itself available to the Ready Link network.  
1. When you activate PCS Ready Link for the first time, you will be  
prompted to activate Ready Link service. Press OK (left softkey)  
to activate. (You will see “PreparingReadyLinkservice... Please  
wait.”)  
2. Press R-Link (left softkey) or the Ready Link (Memo) button on  
the side of your phone (  
). (The PCS Ready Link Help  
message will appear.)  
3. Press Yes (left softkey) to read a brief introduction to PCS Ready  
Link, and press Next (left softkey) to continue through the tutorial.  
Your phone is now ready to make and receive PCS Ready Link calls.  
Ready Link Call Alerts  
There are several ways your PCS Phone alerts you during PCS Ready  
Link calls.  
When you make or receive a PCS Ready Link call:  
The phone sounds (depending on the Ringer Type and Ringer  
Volume setting).  
The backlight illuminates.  
The screen displays a PCS Ready Link call message.  
The other party’s PCS Ready Link number and name (if available)  
are displayed.  
The screen displays who has the floor.  
The status of a PCS Ready Link call:  
The Green LED On indicates you have the floor and may speak.  
The Red LED On indicates another contact has the floor.  
The LED Off indicates the floor is open. (You can take the floor  
and speak by pressing and holding  
.)  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
134  
Making and Receiving a PCS Ready Link Call  
Displaying the PCS Ready Link List  
From standby mode, press R-Link (left softkey) or the Ready Link  
(Memo) button on the side of your phone (  
) to access the  
PCS Ready Link List.  
Selecting Contact Lists  
When your phone displays a PCS Ready Link List, the left softkey is  
labeled Goto. To switch to another contact list, press Goto (left  
softkey), highlight your desired list, and press  
.
CompanyList/CompanyGroups contain company-provided contacts  
(up to 200 entries). Your company list can only be created and  
modified by an authorized administrator on the PCS Ready Link  
server. You cannot add, edit, or delete Company List items, but  
you can copy entries to your Personal Lists.  
PersonalList/PersonalGroups contain your personal Ready Link  
contact names and numbers, separately or in groups. You can  
create and edit your own Personal List. Your phone can store a  
total of 200 entries (you may include up to five contacts per  
group).  
Outgoing shows the last 10 different PCS Ready Link calls you  
placed.  
Incoming shows the last 10 different PCS Ready Link calls you  
accepted.  
Missed shows the last 10 PCS Ready Link calls you missed.  
Note: The  
icon next to the group name indicates a group.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
135  
MakingaPCSReadyLinkCall (1-to-1 Call)  
You can place a 1-to-1 PCS Ready Link call by entering a PCS Ready  
Link number or by selecting a contact from the PCS Ready Link List.  
ToplaceaPCSReadyLinkcallbyselectingacontact:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
to access the PCS Ready  
Link List.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight the list from which you want  
to place a call (CompanyList, PersonalList, Outgoing, Incoming, or  
Missed), and press  
.
Tip: You can also select Enter R-Link# from the Go to option to enter a PCS Ready  
Link number directly. (See page 138 for details.)  
3. Highlight the contact you want to call, and press and hold  
to place the call and get the floor. (You will see R-Linkcalling...  
and Connecting... followed by “Youhavefloor.You can now  
begin speaking.)  
– or –  
Highlight the contact you want to call and press and release  
to place the call. (The call will connect as described above,  
but “Floorisopen.” will appear on the screen and either you or  
your contact may press and hold  
to take the floor and  
speak.)  
To see an entry’s information, press  
during step 3 above.  
Note: During a PCS Ready Link call, the “floor” is the right to speak. When you see  
Floor is open.,” the first person to press the Ready Link (Memo) button ( ) can  
speak (while holding the button). Only the person who has the floor can speak.  
The phone beeps if you press the Ready Link (Memo) button when another  
contact has the floor.  
4. Continue holding  
as you speak. When you are finished  
speaking, release the Ready Link (Memo) button to allow other  
contacts to speak. (When the other party takes the floor, you  
will see the speaker’s name and phone number and the text  
hasfloor.”)  
5. When you are finished, press  
.
Note: When neither party has the floor during a PCS Ready Link call,  
Floor is open.” appears on the display. If no one takes the floor for 20 seconds,  
the PCS Ready Link call ends automatically.  
Tip: If you press  
voice call.  
or  
during step 3 above, you can make a standard  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
136  
Making a PCS Ready Link Call (Group Call)  
You can make a PCS Ready Link call to all members in a Group entry,  
which you have in your PCS Ready Link List. You can communicate  
with up to five members at a time.  
ToplaceaPCSReadyLinkGroupcall:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
to access the PCS Ready  
Link List.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight the list from which you want  
to make a Group call (CompanyGroups or PersonalGroups), and  
press  
.
3. Highlight the group you want to call, and press and hold  
to  
place the call and take the floor. (You will see R-Linkcalling... and  
Connecting... followed by “Youhavefloor.” Continue with the  
PCS Ready Link call as described on the previous page.)  
To display a group member’s details, press , highlight  
your desired group member, then press View (left softkey)  
during step 3 above. Press  
to make a PCS Ready Link  
call to the member.  
If one of the group members takes the floor, you will see the  
member’s name and PCS Ready Link number on the display.  
The phone beeps if you press the Ready Link (Memo)  
button when another contact has the floor.  
4. When the call is finished, press  
.
Tip: You can also make a Group Call after checking the group member. Press  
to display group members, highlight <Call Group> and press and hold  
step 3 above.  
during  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
137  
Making a PCS Ready Link Call by Entering a Number  
ToplaceaPCSReadyLinkcallbyenteringanumber:  
1. From standby mode, enter the PCS Ready Link number you  
want to dial.  
2. Press  
to place the PCS Ready Link call. Continue holding  
to take the floor and speak.  
The contact’s name appears on the display if there is a  
matched number in your PCS Ready Link List.  
3. Continue with the PCS Ready Link call, pressing and holding  
to speak and releasing it to allow others to reply.  
4. When the call is finished, press  
.
– or –  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
to access the PCS Ready  
Link List.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight EnterR-Link# and press  
3. Enter the PCS Ready Link number you want to dial.  
4. Follow steps 2-4 above.  
.
Note: PCS Ready Link numbers must contain ten digits (area code + phone  
number). Your PCS Ready Link number is the same as your PCS Phone number.  
Missed Call Notification for PCS Ready Link Calls  
When an incoming PCS Ready Link call is not answered, the Missed  
Call Notification is displayed on your screen.  
TocallthelastMissedPCSReadyLinkcall:  
Simply press and hold  
while the Missed Call Notification is  
displayed. (Continue with the PCS Ready Link call as described  
previously.)  
TodisplaytheMissedReadyLinkCallLog:  
Press View (left softkey). To call the entry, highlight the entry  
you want to call, and press and hold  
. (Continue with the  
PCS Ready Link call as described previously.)  
Note: When you display Missed Calls entries, you will see the icon next to the  
name. The icon will remain until you make or receive a PCS Ready Link call to  
or from the entry. The  
icon appears next to the new missed call entry.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
138  
Receiving aPCSReadyLinkCall(1-to-1 Call)  
1. Make sure your phone’s PCS Ready Link mode is enabled (see  
“Setting PCS Ready Link Mode” on page 133).  
2. When you receive a PCS Ready Link call from a contact, “R-Link  
Call,” the contact’s name, and the PCS Ready Link number  
appear on the display. (You do not need to take any action to  
answer the call.)  
3. If the person placing the call has kept the floor (held the  
Ready Link [Memo] button), you will see the contact name and  
PCS Ready Link number along with “hasfloor.”, and you will  
hear the caller speaking.  
4. When the caller finishes speaking and releases the Ready Link  
(Memo) button, you will see “Floorisopen.” on the display  
screen. Press and hold  
to take the floor and reply to the  
caller. (You will see “Youhavefloor.” and hear a tone confirming  
that you may speak.)  
5. When the conversation is finished, press  
.
Receiving a PCS Ready Link Call (Group Call)  
1. When you receive a PCS Ready Link call from one of the group  
members, “Group Call,” the group member’s name, and the  
PCS Ready Link number appear on the display.  
2. Continue with the PCS Ready Link call as described previously.  
3. When the conversation is finished, press  
.
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
139  
Redialing a PCS Ready Link Call  
You can redial to the last PCS Ready Link call that you dialed or  
received (whichever was more recent).  
ToredialaPCSReadyLinkcall:  
1. From the PCS Ready Link List, highlight Redial, and press and  
hold  
.
You will see R-Linkredialing... and Connecting... followed by  
the text “Youhavefloor.”  
2. Speak after the beep (keep pressing down  
while you are  
speaking). After speaking, release the button to allow others to  
reply.  
3. When you are finished, press  
.
Note: You can change the volume and the speaker setting while a PCS Ready  
Link call is activated. Volume: Adjust the voice volume by using the Side Volume  
key or by pressing the navigation key up or down except when you are pressing  
and holding  
. Speaker: Switch the speaker on or off by pressing  
.
PCS Ready Link Options  
When you use PCS Ready Link, several user options are available by  
pressing Options (right softkey). To select an option, highlight it and  
press  
.
Copy to copy a contact to the Personal List. CopyGroup appears  
when you highlight a group. (This option doesn’t appear if the  
entry is already in the Personal List or when you select Personal  
List/Personal Groups.)  
Edit to edit a PCS Ready Link number and/or name. See page 145.  
Erase to erase a contact. EraseGroup appears when you highlight a  
group.  
AddContact to add a new contact. AddGroup appears when you  
highlight a group list. See page 143 for details.  
EraseR-LinkList to erase entries saved in the PCS Ready Link List  
(except Company List/Company Groups).  
Help to see the PCS Ready Link instruction page.  
Note: When you use additional accessories, the volume of Ready Link floor tones  
is fixed as follows. Speaker/Car Kit: Level 3. Earpiece/Headset: Level 2.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
140  
Adding and Editing Ready Link Contacts  
CopyinganEntrytoPersonalListorPersonalGroupList  
You can copy an entry to your Personal Lists from several different  
sources. If the selected entry is already stored in the Personal Lists,  
the “copy” option does not appear.  
TocopyanentryfromthelastPCSReadyLinkcall:  
1. From the PCS Ready Link List, highlight Redial and press  
2. Press Copy (right softkey).  
.
3. Press Yes (left softkey) to complete copying.  
TocopyanentryfromthePCSReadyLinkList:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
to access the PCS Ready  
Link List.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight the list from which you want  
to copy a contact (CompanyList, CompanyGroups, Outgoing,  
Incoming, or Missed), and press  
.
3. Highlight the entry you want to copy (or scroll to highlight the  
Redial entry at the top of your screen) and press Options (right  
softkey).  
4. Highlight Copy and press  
.
CopyGroup appears when you highlight a group during  
step 3 above.  
5. Press Yes (left softkey) to copy and save the entry to your  
Personal List or Personal Group List.  
TocopyanentryfromtheCompanyList:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select Find/AddEntry and press  
4. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight CompanyList, and press  
5. Highlight a contact you want to copy and press Options (right  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
CopytoPersonal to copy the entry to the Personal List.  
CopytoPh. Book to copy the entry to the Contacts list.  
6. Press Yes (left softkey) to complete copying.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
141  
TocopyanentryfromtheCompanyGroupList:  
1. From step 4 on the previous page, highlight CompanyGroups and  
press  
.
2. Highlight a group you want to copy and press Options (right  
softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
CopytoPersonal to copy the entry to your Personal Group List.  
Exit to exit the options.  
3. Press Yes (left softkey) to complete copying.  
Note: Your Company Lists can only be set up and edited by an authorized  
administrator on the PCS Ready Link server. You cannot add or edit  
contacts/groups to your Company Lists.  
Saving a PCS Ready Link Number  
When you have finished a PCS Ready Link call, you will see the  
caller’s name, PCS Ready Link number, and the text “R-Link call  
ended.” on the display. You can save a PCS Ready Link number from  
the ending display to your Personal Lists.  
Tosavethenumber:  
1. From the ending display, press Save (right softkey).  
2. Press Yes (left softkey).  
If the entry has no name, you are prompted to enter a name.  
Note: If the number is already stored in the Personal List or Personal Groups, the  
“Save” softkey does not appear.  
Finding an Entry in the PCS Ready Link List  
You can find your desired entry by entering a few letters.  
TofindaPCSReadyLinkentry:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
to access the PCS Ready  
Link List.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight your desired list (CompanyList,  
CompanyGroups, PersonalList, or PersonalGroups), and press  
.
3. Enter the first letter or the first few letters of the name.  
The display shows the list beginning with the letter(s) you  
entered.  
4. Scroll through the list and press  
to select your desired entry.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
142  
Adding a New Contact toYour Personal List  
You can store a total of 200 entries in the Personal Lists.  
ToaddanewPCSReadyLinkcontact:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
to access the PCS Ready  
Link List.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight PersonalList, and press  
.
3. Highlight <AddContact> and press  
.
– or –  
Highlight an entry and press Options (right softkey). Then  
highlight AddContact and press  
.
If the Personal List is full, you will see a warning message on  
the display. (Your phone can store a total of 200 Ready Link  
Personal List or Personal Group contacts.)  
4. Enter a name for the new contact and press . (This is the  
name you will see when calling or receiving a call from the  
contact.)  
5. Highlight the R-LinkNumber field, enter the contact’s 10-digit  
PCS Ready Link number (their PCS Phone number) and  
press  
.
6. Press Save (left softkey) to save the new contact to your  
Personal List.  
Tip: You are not allowed to use the following symbols during step 4: “:”, “@”, “;”,  
“/”, “*”, “)”, and “(”.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
143  
Adding a New Group toYour Personal Group List  
You can add new groups to the Personal Group List. Each group can  
include up to five members. You can enter a group member directly,  
or select the member from the Company List or Personal List.  
ToaddanewPCSReadyLinkgroupentry:  
1. Press R-Link (left softkey) or press  
to access the PCS Ready  
Link List.  
2. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight PersonalGroups, and press  
.
3. Highlight <AddGroup> and press  
.
– or –  
Highlight an entry and press Options (right softkey). Then  
highlight AddGroup and press  
.
4. Enter a Group Name, press , and press Next (left softkey).  
5. To add contacts to the group, press Add (right softkey).  
6. Highlight one item from the following and press  
:
New to add a new contact. See the previous page for details.  
fromCompany to add a contact from your Company List.  
fromPersonal to add a contact from your Personal List.  
7. Scroll to select the contacts you want to add and press  
or  
Pick (right softkey) to include the entries.  
8. Press Done (left softkey) when you are finished selecting  
contacts, then press Update (left softkey) to update your  
Personal Group List with the new group entry.  
Tip: You can also add members directly. From step 5 above, highlight  
<Add Members> and press . Enter the new member’s name and R-Link number  
and press Save (left softkey) to save the entry.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
144  
Editing a Contact inYour Personal List  
ToeditaPersonalListcontact:  
1. Follow steps 1-2 in “Adding a New Contact to Your Personal  
List” on page 143.  
2. Highlight the entry you want to edit and press Options (right  
softkey).  
Edit to edit the selected contact.  
Erase to erase the selected contact.  
AddContact to add a new contact.  
EraseR-LinkList to erase the PCS Ready Link List.  
See page 147 for details.  
Help to view the PCS Ready Link instruction page.  
3. Highlight Edit and press  
4. Highlight the field you want to edit (Name or R-LinkNumber),  
and press  
.
.
5. Edit the entry, press OK (left softkey), and press Save (left  
softkey) to save your changes.  
Editing a Group inYour Personal Group List  
Toeditagroupname:  
1. Follow steps 1-2 in “Adding a New Group to Your Personal  
Group List” on the previous page.  
2. Highlight the group entry you want to edit and press Options  
(right softkey).  
Edit to edit the selected group.  
EraseGroup to erase the selected group.  
AddGroup to add a new group.  
EraseR-LinkList to erase the PCS Ready Link List.  
See page 147 for details.  
Help to view the PCS Ready Link instruction page.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
145  
3. Highlight Edit and press  
.
4. Edit the group name and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
If you don’t need to edit the group name, press Next (left  
softkey) during step 4 above and skip step 5.  
5. Press Save (left softkey) to save your changes.  
6. To edit a group member, highlight the contact you want to edit  
and press Options (right softkey).  
Edit to edit a group member’s name and phone number.  
Erase to erase the group member.  
AddNew to add a new group member in the Personal Group  
List.  
Add(Company) to add a new group member from the  
Company List.  
Add(Personal) to add a new group member from the  
Personal List.  
Details to display a group member’s information.  
7. Highlight Edit and press  
8. Highlight the field you want to edit (Name or R-LinkNumber) and  
press  
.
.
9. Edit the entry, press OK (left softkey), and press Save (left  
softkey) to save your changes.  
10. Press Update (left softkey) to update your Personal Group List.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
146  
Erasing Ready Link List Entries  
Erasing an Entry inYour Personal List or Personal  
Group List  
Toeraseacontactoragroup:  
1. From the PCS Ready Link List, press Goto (left softkey),  
highlight PersonalList or PersonalGroups, and press  
.
2. Highlight the entry you want to erase and press Options (right  
softkey).  
3. Highlight Erase and press  
.
EraseGroup appears when you select Personal Groups.  
4. Select Yes and press  
Toeraseagroupmember:  
1. From the PCS Ready Link List, press Goto (left softkey),  
.
highlight PersonalGroups, and press  
.
2. Highlight your desired group and press  
to display the group  
members.  
3. Highlight the contact you want to erase and press Options (right  
softkey).  
4. Highlight Erase and press  
5. Select Yes and press  
.
.
6. Press Update (left softkey) to update your Personal Group List.  
Erasing a PCS Ready Link List  
You can erase all entries saved in the PCS Ready Link List (except  
Company List/Company Groups).  
ToeraseaPCSReadyLinkList:  
1. From the PCS Ready Link List, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Highlight EraseR-LinkList and press  
.
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
147  
3. Highlight your desired option and press  
.
Outgoing to erase all outgoing PCS Ready Link calls.  
Incoming to erase all incoming PCS Ready Link calls.  
Missed to erase all missed PCS Ready Link calls.  
All to erase all PCS Ready Link call history, except redial.  
AllPersonalEnt. to erase all entries in Personal List and  
Personal Groups. You are prompted to enter your 4-digit  
lock code. (See “Unlocking Your Phone” on page 66.)  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
Tip: The Redial number will not be erased.  
UpdatingYour PCS Ready Link Lists  
Updating the Company List and Personal List  
ToupdateyourCompanyListandPersonalListmanuallythrough  
thePCSReadyLinkserver:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
4. Select ListUpdate and press  
.
.
.
Managing PCS Ready Link Settings  
Setting Speed Dialing for PCS Ready Link Entries  
TosetSpeedDialingforPCSReadyLinkentries:  
1. Press  
2. Select Contacts and press  
3. Select SpeedDial#s and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Highlight an unassigned number and press  
.
When you highlight an assigned number and press  
,
you’ll be asked whether you want to overwrite the assigned  
number. Select Yes or No, or you can also select Unassign to  
cancel the stored speed dial.  
5. Press Goto (left softkey), highlight the list from which you want  
to set a speed dial (CompanyList, CompanyGroups, PersonalList,  
or PersonalGroups) and press  
.
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
148  
6. Select the contact and press  
.
– or –  
Select the group and press , select an option, and press  
.
Assign to assign the selected group as a speed dial.  
Details to display the group details. You can select the entry  
from the group list.  
TouseSpeedDialforaPCSReadyLinkentry:  
From standby mode, press the appropriate key and press and  
hold  
.
Restarting the Ready Link Service  
TorestartthePCSReadyLinkservice:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select RestartR-Link and press  
.
Setting Ready Link Guard  
This feature enables you to display the warning message when you  
cannot receive PCS Ready Link calls. The warning message will  
appear when you are launching a Web or Java application, or  
sending/uploading your pictures.  
TosettheReadyLinkGuard:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select R-LinkGuard and press . (A message will appear.)  
5. Press OK (left softkey) to continue.  
6. Select On and press  
.
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 6 above.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
149  
Setting RingerTypes for PCS Ready Link Calls  
Your PCS Vision Phone provides a variety of ringer types that allow  
you to customize your ringer and volume settings.  
ToselectaringertypeforPCSReadyLinkcalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
4. Select RingerType and press  
.
.
.
5. Select the menu under ReadyLinkCalls and press  
.
6. Select your desired ringer type and press  
.
To confirm the ringer, press Play (right softkey).  
Tip: You can also change the ringer type from the Settings menu (see “Selecting  
Ringer Types for PCS Ready Link Calls” on page 37).  
Setting an Alert Notification for PCS Ready Link Calls  
Your PCS Phone can alert you with an audible tone when you receive  
a PCS Ready Link call.  
TosetalertsforPCSReadyLinkcalls:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select Alerts and press  
.
5. Select Once or RepeatAlert and press  
.
Tip: You can also set alerts from the Settings menu (see “Alert Notification” on  
page 42).  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
150  
Setting the Speakerphone for PCS Ready Link Calls  
You can set the speakerphone on or off when PCS Ready Link call is  
activated. By default, the speakerphone is set to on.  
Tosetthespeakerphoneonoroff:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select Speakerphone and press  
5. Select On or Off and press  
Note: If the phone’s ringer volume is set to Vibrate, Ringer off, or Silence All, the  
.
.
speakerphone turns off. Press to turn the speakerphone mode on.  
Setting the DefaultView of the PCS Ready Link List  
You can select the default PCS Ready Link List when PCS Ready Link  
is launched.  
ToselectthedefaultviewofthePCSReadyLinkList:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select ReadyLink and press  
.
4. Select DefaultView and press . (The default setting is  
CompanyList.)  
5. Select your desired list and press  
.
Note: If there are no data in the Company lists, your phone will display your  
Personal List.  
Section 2J: Using PCS Ready Link  
151  
Section 2K  
Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
In This Section  
TakingPictures  
SM  
SendingPictureMail  
StoringPicturesinMyPictures  
SM  
ManagingPictureMail  
YourPCSVisionPicturePhone’sbuilt-incameragivesyoutheabilityto  
takefull-colordigitalpictures, view your pictures using the phone’s  
display, and instantly send them to your family and friends. It’s fun  
and as easy to use as a traditional point-and-click camera: just take a  
picture, view it on your phone’s display, and send it from your  
phone to up to ten people.  
This section explains the features and options of your PCS Vision  
Picture Phone’s built-in camera.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
152  
Taking Pictures  
Taking pictures with your phone’s built-in camera is as simple as  
choosing a subject, pointing the lens, and pressing a button. You can  
activate camera mode and take pictures whether the phone is open  
or closed.  
Totakeapicturewiththephoneopen:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Pictures and press  
to access the Pictures menu.  
to activate camera mode.  
3. Select Camera and press  
(Additional user options are available through the camera mode  
Options menu. See “Camera Mode Options” on page 155 for  
more information.)  
Shortcut: To activate camera mode, you can also press and hold  
camera key (see illustration on page 10).  
or the side  
4. Using the phone’s main LCD as a viewfinder, aim the camera  
lens at your subject.  
5. To take the picture, press  
,
, Capture (left softkey), or the  
Side Camera key. (The picture will be saved automatically in  
your In Camera folder.)  
To return to camera mode to take another picture, press  
.
6. Press Next (right softkey) to go to the next step.  
Steps:  
SendPicture to send the picture. (See page 162 for details.)  
Upload to upload the picture you just took to the Picture Mail  
Website. Depending on your settings, you may be prompted to  
accept a PCS Vision connection.  
SetasPictureID to assign the picture as a Picture ID.  
SetasScrnSaver to assign the picture as a Screen Saver.  
GotoCamera to return to camera mode to take another picture.  
Picsincamera to go to the In Camera folder to review your saved  
pictures.  
Delete to delete the picture you just took.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
153  
Totakeapicturewiththephoneclosed:  
1. Press and hold the side camera key to activate camera mode.  
2. Point the camera lens at your subject. (You can check the  
picture framing through the Sub LCD.)  
Note: When taking a picture with the phone closed, the subject image appears in  
reverse on the external display. The captured image will not be saved in reverse.  
3. Press the side camera key to take the picture. (The picture will  
be saved automatically in your In Camera folder.)  
Open the flip to review the picture and go to the next step.  
Note: While you are taking a picture, the backlight turns on even if your backlight  
is set to Always Off.  
Note: In some cases, the screen may flicker and the stripes may appear on the  
display under fluorescent lighting.  
SM  
CreatingYour Picture Mail Password  
The first time you use any of the Picture Mail management options  
involving the Picture Mail Website, you will need to establish a  
Picture Mail password through your PCS Vision Picture Phone. This  
password will also allow you to sign in to the Picture Mail Website at  
picturemail.sprintpcs.com to access and manage your uploaded pictures  
and albums.  
TocreateyourPictureMailpassword:  
1. Press  
2. Select Pictures and press  
3. Select OnlineAlbums and press  
to access the main menu.  
to access the Pictures menu.  
.
4. Select ViewAlbums and press . (You will be prompted to  
create a pictures password.)  
Note: If your PCS Service Plan does not include Picture Mail, you will first be  
prompted to subscribe to the service for an additional monthly charge.  
5. Enter a four- to eight-digit password and press  
or OK (left  
softkey).  
6. Please wait while the system creates your account.  
Tip: Write down your Picture Mail password in a secure place.  
Once your account has been successfully registered, you may upload  
and send pictures and access the Picture Mail Website.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
154  
Camera Mode Options  
When the phone is open and in camera mode, several user options  
are available.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display additional user options:  
Flash to activate the flash function. (See “Setting the Flash  
Function” on the next page for details.)  
Self-timer to activate the camera’s timer function. (See “Setting  
the Self-timer” on the next page for details.)  
FunTools to select an option from the following:  
FunFrames to select your favorite fun picture frame to  
decorate your picture.  
MultipleShots to take multiple shots. (See “Taking Multiple  
Shots” on page 157 for details.)  
ColorTone to select a wide variety of color tones for the  
picture (Normal, Sepia, Black&White, Negative, Posterization  
or Emboss).  
ImageControls to select an option from the following:  
Brightness to select Auto or Manual brightness control. If you  
select Manual, press the navigation key right (increase) or  
left (decrease) to select a setting and press  
to apply the  
desired setting.  
WhiteBalance to adjust white balance based on changing  
conditions. Select from Auto, Sunny, Cloudy, Tungsten,  
Fluorescent, or Manual.  
CameraSettings to select Resolution, Quality, ShutterSound,  
StatusArea, or AutoDelete. (See “Selecting Camera Settings” on  
page 159 for details.)  
Picsincamera to go to your phone’s In Camera folder. (See “In  
Camera Folder” on page 165 for details.)  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
155  
SettingtheFlashFunction  
Toactivatetheflashfunction:  
1. With the phone open and in camera mode, press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Select Flash and press  
.
3. Select an option from the following and press  
.
OnThisShot to activate the flash for one shot.  
OnAlways to activate the flash all the time.  
Auto to activate the flash automatically.  
4. Take a picture using the phone’s main LCD as a viewfinder.  
To deactivate this feature, select Off during step 3.  
Tip: When the phone is open and in camera mode, press  
between flash modes.  
to switch  
SettingtheSelf-timer  
ToactivatetheSelf-timer:  
1. With the phone open and in camera mode, press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight Self-timer and press  
3. Highlight the length of delay you want the timer to use  
(10seconds or 5seconds) and press  
4. Press Start (left softkey) when you are ready to start the timer.  
appears on the lower left portion of the main LCD during  
.
.
(
the Self-timer countdown.)  
5. Get ready for the picture. (When the timer is down to three  
seconds, the Self-timer icon will turn red and the phone will  
begin to beep.)  
Note: After taking a picture, Self-timer settings return to their default settings.  
TocanceltheSelf-timerafterithasstarted:  
Press Cancel (right softkey).  
Note: While the Self-timer is active, all keys are disabled except  
Cancel (right softkey).  
,
, and  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
156  
TakingMultipleShots  
This feature allows you to take up to 8 continuous shots of one  
moment. When you take multiple shots, will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
Totakemultipleshots:  
1. With the phone open and in camera mode, press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Highlight FunTools and press  
3. Highlight MultipleShots and press  
Note: If your phone’s memory is full, the “Multiple Shots”option will not appear.  
.
.
4. Select your desired option from the following and press  
.
2Shots to take series of 2 shots.  
4Shots to take series of 4 shots. (Only appears when the  
reslolution setting is Low or Medium.)  
8Shots to take series of 8 shots. (Only appears when the  
reslolution setting is Low.)  
5. Select the duration of the interval between shots from  
Normal or Fast and press  
.
6. To take the pictures, press . (The Multiple Shots folder will  
display, up to four thumbnail pictures per screen.)  
To deactivate this feature,select Off during step 4 above.  
Tip: After taking multiple shots, the pictures are automatically saved in the  
In Camera folder. (See “In Camera Folder” on page 165 for details.)  
When you are in Multiple Shots folder,several user options are  
available.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display the following options:  
Upload to upload pictures saved in your phone to the Picture Mail  
Website.  
SetasPictureID to display the picture as a Picture ID.  
SetasScrnSaver to display the picture as a screen saver.  
GotoCamera to activate camera mode.  
Picsincamera to access the In Camera folder.  
Delete to delete pictures in the In Camera folder.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
157  
Slideshow to display your pictures as a slideshow. (Only appears  
when you have two or more pictures in the folder.)  
InfoBar to display information on the currently highlighted  
picture. (Expanded picture only)  
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from full-screen to  
thumbnail view (up to four pictures per screen).  
UsingtheZoomFunction  
This feature allows you to zoom in on an object when you take a  
picture. Depending on your resolution settings, you can adjust the  
zoom from 1-step to 20-step.  
Tousethezoomfunction:  
1. With the phone open and in camera mode, press the navigation  
key right or left to adjust the zoom. (The zoom icon changes as  
you press.)  
2. Press  
to take the picture. (The picture will be saved  
automatically in your In Camera folder.)  
Note: The Zoom icons will not appear when the Resolution setting is High.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
158  
Selecting Camera Settings  
Toselectyourcamerasettings:  
1. With the phone open and in camera mode, press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Select CameraSettings and press  
.
3. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Resolution to select a file size (High, Medium, or Low) for a  
picture.  
Quality to select Economy, Normal, or Fine picture quality.  
ShutterSound to select a shutter sound. (See “Setting the  
Shutter Sound” below for details.)  
StatusArea to select a picture status display setting. Select  
Off to hide picture status, such as icons and number of  
captured pictures. To display the status, select On.  
(See “Viewing Your Camera’s Status Area Display” on the  
next page for details.)  
AutoDelete to set the auto delete function. (See “Setting the  
Auto Delete Function” on the next page for details.)  
SettingtheShutterSound  
ToselecttheShutterSound:  
1. With the phone open and in camera mode, press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Select CameraSettings and press  
.
3. Select ShutterSound and press  
.
4. Select an option from the following and press  
.
Default plays the default shutter sound.  
SayCheez” plays a recording of the phrase “Say Cheez.”  
Off makes no sound.  
RecordYourOwn allows you to record your own voice.  
Press  
to display options, highlight Record and press  
.
Press  
to start recording. (Maximum recording time is  
5 seconds.) To save the recording, press Save (right  
softkey).  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
159  
SettingtheAutoDeleteFunction  
With this feature, pictures which have been uploaded to your online  
Picture Mail account will be erased automatically from your phone.  
TosettheAutoDeletefunction:  
1. With the phone open and in camera mode, press Options (right  
softkey).  
2. Select CameraSettings and press  
3. Select AutoDelete and press  
.
.
4. Select Yes and press  
to activate the auto delete function.  
To deactivate this feature, select No during step 4 above.  
Note: The locked pictures will not be deleted automatically.  
ViewingYour Camera’s StatusArea Display  
CameraStatusArea  
( V i e w f i n d e r )  
Brightness  
Zoom  
White Balance  
Multiple Shots  
Self-Timer  
Flash  
Resolution  
Memory Gauge  
Capture  
Options  
Camera Status Area  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
160  
IconIndication  
No.  
Function  
Icons  
Details  
To use a flash only one shot after setting  
this function.  
OnThis Shot  
On Always  
Auto  
To use a flash every time you take a picture.  
To use the auto flash function.  
Flash  
1
Use this setting for sunny weather.  
Use this setting for cloudy weather.  
Use this setting for tungsten lighting.  
Use this setting for fluorescent lighting.  
Sunny  
Cloudy  
White  
Tungsten  
Fluorescent  
Manual  
Manual  
1 step  
2
3
4
Balance  
For the manual setting of white balance.  
For the manual setting of brightness.  
Brightness  
Zoom  
For 1-step zoom. Appears when the  
resolution setting is Medium or Low.  
For 2-step zoom. Appears when the  
resolution setting is Medium or Low.  
2 step  
For 8-step zoom. Appears when the  
resolution setting is Low.  
8 step  
For 8-step zoom. Appears when the  
resolution setting is Medium.  
For 20-step zoom. Appears when the  
resolution setting is Low.  
20 step  
Use this setting for Multiple Shots.  
Shows the remaining memory.  
The number of stored pictures.  
Multiple Shots  
5
6
Memory Gauge  
Picture Number  
Remaining Pictures  
The count of pictures you can take with  
current resolution.  
Use this setting for self portralts.  
Numeric countdown will appear during  
the self-timer countdown.  
Self-timer  
5s  
7
8
For high picture resolution.  
For medium picture resolution.  
For low picture resolution.  
High  
Resolution Medium  
Low  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
161  
SM  
Sending Picture Mail  
Once you’ve taken a picture, you can use the messaging capabilities  
of your PM-8200 by Sanyo to instantly send it to family and friends.  
You can send a picture to up to ten people at a time using their email  
addresses or their PCS Vision Phone numbers.  
Sending Picture Mail From the In Camera Folder  
TosendPictureMailfromtheInCamerafolder:  
1. With the clamshell open, press  
to access the Pictures menu.  
2. Select MyPictures and press  
.
3. Select InCamera and press  
.
4. Press to select a picture. (The check box on the lower right  
corner will be marked. You can select multiple pictures.)  
If there is no selected picture, the currently highlighted picture  
will be selected.  
5. Press Send (left softkey).  
6. Select an option from the following and press  
.
FromPhoneBook to select a recipient from your Contacts list.  
Highlight a recipient and press to select.  
MobilePhone# to enter a mobile phone number directly.  
EmailAddress to enter an email address directly.  
Note: If there are no entries in your contact list, you will be prompted to enter  
either an email address or a mobile phone number.  
Note: The  
and  
icons next to contact’s names represent Mobile Phone  
M
@
and email. When entering a new contact, use your navigation key to select the  
correct icon for the entry. You can also select both the mobile phone number and  
M
email address at once by selecting  
icon.  
@
7. Press Next (left softkey) when you are finished  
selecting/entering recipients. (You may include up to ten  
recipients per Picture Mail.)  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
162  
8. If you wish to record and include a Voice Memo with the picture  
you are sending, highlight the box under VoiceMemo and press  
Record (right softkey). Press  
to start recording. (Maximum  
recording time is 10 seconds.)  
9. If you wish to enter a text message, highlight the box under  
Message and press Change (right softkey). Enter your message  
using your keypad (or press Mode [right softkey] to select from  
PresetMessages or RecentMessages) and press  
.
(See “Entering Text” on page 31.)  
10. Confirm the recipients, message, voice memo, and picture.  
To change a recipient, highlight the recipient, press Change  
(right softkey), and follow the instructions in step 6 on the  
previous page to select or edit the recipient.  
To change Voice Memo, highlight the box beneath  
VoiceMemo and press Options (right softkey) to display  
options:  
VoiceMemoPlay to play the attached voice memo.  
VoiceMemoRec to re-record the voice memo.  
VoiceMemoErase to delete the voice memo from the  
Picture Mail.  
To change the attached message, highlight the box beneath  
Message and press Change (right softkey).  
To change the attached pictures, select a thumbnail picture  
using your navigation key and press Change (right softkey).  
Select an alternate picture and press , then press Next  
(left softkey).  
11. Press Send (left softkey) to send the Picture Mail.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
163  
Sending Picture Mail from Messaging  
You can also send your pictures from your phone’s Messaging menu.  
TosendPictureMailfromtheMessagingmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
to access the Messaging menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
Shortcut: Press the navigation key up from standby mode to access the  
Messaging menu.  
3. Select PictureMail and press  
.
4. Select SendPicture and press  
.
5. Select FromMyPics. and press . (The In Camera folder will  
display, up to four thumbnail pictures per screen.)  
6. Use the navigation key to display the picture you wish to send  
and press . (You can select multiple pictures.)  
Tip: To expand a selected picture from thumbnail to full-screen, press and hold  
.
7. Press Next (left softkey). To complete and send the Picture Mail,  
follow steps 6-11 in “Sending Picture Mail From the In Camera  
Folder” on page 162.  
Tip: If you want to take a new picture and send it, select Take Picture during  
step 5 above. Take the new picture, press Next (right softkey) and follow  
steps 6-11 in “Sending Picture Mail From the In Camera Folder”on page 162.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
164  
Storing Pictures in My Pictures  
My Pictures is your phone’s picture storage area. There are two types  
of folders in My Pictures that can be used separately according to  
your needs. They are:  
InCameraFolder (see below)  
SavedtoPhoneFolder (see page 168)  
In Camera Folder  
Once a picture is taken, it is automatically saved to the folder called  
“In Camera.You can enter the In Camera folder from MyPictures  
menu by selecting InCamera. From the In Camera folder, you can  
view all the pictures you have taken, store selected images in your  
phone, send pictures to the Picture Mail Website, delete images, and  
access additional picture options.  
ToreviewyourstoredpicturesintheInCamerafolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Pictures and press  
to access the Pictures menu.  
.
3. Select MyPictures and press  
4. Select InCamera and press . (Thumbnail pictures will display,  
up to four pictures at a time.)  
5. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through pictures.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
165  
In Camera Folder Options  
When you are in the In Camera folder, several user options are available.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display the following options:  
Upload to select an option from the following to upload pictures  
saved in your phone to the Picture Mail Website. Depending on  
your settings, you may be prompted to accept a PCS Vision  
connection.  
ThisPicture to upload the currently highlighted picture.  
SelectedPictures to upload the selected pictures. Press  
select a picture (the check box on the lower right corner  
will be marked).  
to  
AllPictures to upload all the pictures in your phone.  
Note: Erasing pictures will free up memory space in your phone to enable you to  
take more pictures. Once erased, pictures cannot be uploaded to your online  
Picture Mail account or saved to the Saved to Phone folder.  
SetasPictureID to display the currently highlighted picture for  
incoming calls from a specific Contacts List entry. Select your  
desired entry and press  
.
SetasScrnSaver to display the currently highlighted picture as a  
screen saver.  
Details/Edit to display the currently highlighted picture’s details or  
edit the pictures. You can select from TextCaption, PictureInfo,  
ColorTone, or RotatePicture.  
Delete to delete pictures in the In Camera folder. Select ThisPicture,  
SelectedPictures, or AllPictures.  
Lock to lock your picture to protect from unintentional deletion.  
Unlock to unlock your picture.  
SavetoPhone to save the selected images in the Saved to Phone  
folder.  
SortbyDate to sort pictures by date. (Thumbnail picture only.)  
Select Taken-Descending, Taken-Ascending, Uploaded-Descend, or  
Uploaded-Ascend.  
Slideshow to display your pictures as a slideshow. (Only appears  
when you have two or more pictures in the folder.)  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
166  
InfoBar to display information on the selected picture, such as  
folder name, picture number, caption, etc. Select On to display  
the caption of a picture; select Off to hide the information.  
(Expanded picture only.)  
Tip: From expanded picture display, press the navigation key up or down to hide  
or display the Info Bar.  
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from full-screen to  
thumbnail view (up to four pictures per screen).  
GotoSavedtoPh. to access the Saved to Phone folder.  
GotoCamera to activate camera mode.  
Note: Save to Phone and Upload copy pictures from your phone’s In Camera  
folder to your Saved to Phone folder or your online Picture Mail account.  
Pictures that have been stored to your Saved to Phone folder or uploaded to your  
online account will remain available in the In Camera folder until you erase them.  
Note: If this is the first time you have accessed the Picture Mail account, you will  
be prompted to create your Picture Mail password. (See “Creating Your Picture  
Mail Password” on page 154.)  
InCameraFolder  
Folder name  
Uploaded icon  
Locked icon  
Count of Saved Pictures  
Current Picture number  
In Camera  
1/6  
(View 1)  
Latest  
(View 2)  
2nd latest  
Check Box  
(View 3)  
3rd latest  
(View 4)  
4th latest  
Caption  
left softkey  
Title-1  
Send  
Options  
right softkey  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
167  
Saved to Phone Folder  
When you assign or download a picture, the picture will be saved  
automatically to the separate folder called “Saved to Phone.”  
The Saved to Phone folder allows you to store copies of pictures on  
your phone and to assign pictures to various phone tasks.  
TosaveapicturetotheSavedtoPhonefolder:  
1. From the In Camera folder (see “In Camera Folder” on page 165),  
select a picture you wish to save to the Saved to Phone folder  
and press . (You may select multiple pictures.)  
2. Press Options (right softkey). (The In Camera folder options will  
display.)  
3. Select SavetoPhone and press . (A copy of the picture will be  
saved to the Saved to Phone folder.)  
ToviewpicturesstoredintheSavedtoPhonefolder:  
1. Press  
2. Select Pictures and press  
Shortcut: Instead of steps 1 and 2 above, press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
3. Select MyPictures and press  
.
4. Select SavedtoPhone and press . (Thumbnail pictures will  
display, up to four pictures at a time.)  
5. Use your navigation key to view and scroll through pictures.  
6. To expand the selected picture, press Expand (left softkey).  
Tip: From expanded view, press and hold the navigation key right or left to display  
the stored picture continuously.  
7. Press Options (right softkey) to display a list of options for the  
selected picture. To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
SetasPictureID to display the currently highlighted picture  
for incoming calls from a specific Contacts List entry.  
SetasScrnSaver to display the currently highlighted picture  
as a screen saver.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
168  
Details/Edit to display the currently highlighted picture’s  
details or edit the pictures. You can select from TextCaption,  
PictureInfo, ColorTone, or RotatePicture.  
Delete to delete pictures stored in the Saved to Phone folder.  
Select ThisPicture, SelectedPictures, or AllPictures.  
Lock to lock your picture to protect from unintentional  
deletion.  
Unlock to unlock your picture.  
SortbyDate to sort pictures by date. (Thumbnail picture only.)  
Select Saved-Descending, or Saved-Ascending.  
Slideshow to display your pictures as a slideshow. (Only  
appears when you have two or more pictures in the folder.)  
InfoBar to display information on the currently highlighted  
picture, such as folder name, picture number, caption, etc.  
(Expanded picture only.)  
Picsincamera to access the In Camera folder.  
GotoCamera to activate camera mode.  
Note: Pictures may be assigned to more than one task.  
Note: Assigned pictures will be identified with the  
.
SavedToPhoneFolder  
Folder name  
Assigned icon  
Locked icon  
Count of Saved Pictures  
Current Picture number  
Saved toPhone 1/6  
(View 1)  
Latest  
(View 2)  
2nd latest  
Check Box  
(View 3)  
3rd latest  
(View 4)  
4th latest  
Caption  
left softkey  
Title-1  
Expand  
Options  
right softkey  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
169  
Managing Picture Mail  
Using the Picture MailWebsite  
Once you have uploaded pictures from your phone to your online  
Picture Mail account (see “In Camera Folder” on page 165), you can  
use your personal computer to manage your pictures. From the  
Picture Mail Website you can send pictures, edit album titles and  
picture captions, organize and move images, and do much more.  
You will also have access to picture management tools to improve  
and customize your pictures. You’ll be able to lighten, darken, crop,  
add antique effects, add comic bubbles and cartoon effects, and use  
other features to transform your pictures.  
ToaccessthePictureMailWebsite:  
1. From your computer’s Internet connection, go to  
2. Enter your PCS Phone Number and Picture Mail password to sign  
on. (See “Creating Your Picture Mail Password” on page 154.)  
Managing Online Picture Mail FromYour  
PCSVision Phone  
You can use your phone to manage, edit, or send pictures you have  
uploaded to the Picture Mail Website. (See “In Camera Folder  
Options” on page 166 for information about uploading.)  
ToviewyouronlinePictureMailfromyourPCSVisionPhone:  
1. Press  
2. Select Pictures and press  
Shortcut: Instead of steps 1 and 2 above, press  
to access the main menu.  
to access the Pictures menu.  
.
3. Select OnlineAlbums and press  
.
4. Select ViewAlbums and press . (Depending on your settings  
you may be prompted to accept a PCS Vision connection.)  
(The Uploads folder and your albums will appear.)  
5. Highlight Uploads or an album title and press  
to display.  
(Thumbnail pictures, up to four per screen are displayed.)  
Tip: To expand a selected picture from thumbnail to full-screen, press and hold  
.
6. Use your navigation key to select a picture.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
170  
UploadingYour Pictures  
Touploadpictures:  
1. Press  
to access the Pictures menu.  
2. Select OnlineAlbums and press  
3. Select UploadPics and press  
.
.
4. Use your navigation key to select a picture, and press Upload  
(left softkey).  
5. Select an option from the following and press  
.
ThisPicture to upload the currently highlighted picture.  
SelectedPictures to upload the selected pictures. Press  
select a picture (the check box on the lower right corner  
will be marked).  
to  
AllPictures to upload all the pictures in your phone.  
Sending Online Picture Mail  
TosendpicturesfromtheonlineAddressBook:  
1. From the online Picture Mail display, select a picture you wish  
to send and press Send (left softkey). (See “Managing Online  
Picture Mail From Your PCS Vision Phone” on the previous page.)  
2. Select OnlineAddr. Book and press  
.
3. To select a recipient, highlight a recipient and press  
.
(You may select up to 10 recipients.)  
4. Press Done (left softkey) when you are finished selecting  
recipients.  
5. To complete and send the Picture Mail, follow steps 8-11 in  
“Sending Picture Mail From the In Camera Folder” on page 163.  
Tosendanalbumfromonlinemode:  
1. From the online Albums display, select an album you wish to  
send and press Send (left softkey). (See “Managing Online  
Picture Mail From Your PCS Vision Phone” on the previous page.)  
2. Follow steps 2-5 above to complete and send your Picture Mail.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
171  
Accessing Online Picture Mail Options FromYour  
PCSVision Phone  
1. Select a picture from your online Picture Mail (see “Managing  
Online Picture Mail From Your PCS Vision Phone” on page 170).  
2. Press Options (right softkey) to display options.  
3. To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
Copy/Move to copy or move pictures to a selected album:  
MoveThis to move the currently highlighted picture to  
the album.  
MoveSelection to move the selected pictures to the album.  
MoveAll to move all pictures in the current album  
(or Uploads) to the target album.  
CopyThis to copy the currently highlighted picture to the  
album.  
CopySelection to copy the selected pictures to the album.  
CopyAll to copy all pictures in the current album  
(or Uploads) to the target album.  
Tip: Press New (right softkey) to copy/move pictures to a new folder.  
Details/Edit toselectTextCaption,PictureInfo, orRotatePicture.  
TextCaption to edit the caption of a currently highlighted  
picture.  
PictureInfo to display information on the currently  
highlighted picture, such as caption, time/date, size, etc.  
RotatePicture to rotate the currently highlighted picture.  
After selecting this option, you can rotate the currently  
highlighted picture by pressing the navigation key right  
or left, or Rotate (right softkey).  
Delete to select ThisPicture, SelectedPictures, or AllPictures  
to erase a single picture, selected pictures, or all pictures  
saved in the current album (or Uploads).  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
172  
SavetoPhone to download to the Saved to Phone folder to  
assign the pictures to the phone task.  
asPictureID to display the currently highlighted picture  
for incoming calls from a specific Contacts List entry.  
asScreenSaver to display the currently highlighted  
picture as a screen saver.  
DownloadOnly to only download the picture to the Saved  
to Phone folder.  
InfoBar to display picture’s information, such as folder  
name, picture number, caption, etc. Select On to display the  
information; select Off to hide the information. (Expanded  
picture only.)  
Tip: From expanded picture display, press the navigation key up or down to hide  
or display the Info Bar.  
Thumbnail/Expand to switch the display from thumbnail view  
(up to four pictures per screen) to full-screen.  
CreateAlbum to create a new album (from Uploads only).  
Enter the album name and select Save (left softkey).  
OnlineAlbums to switch the display to the online album list.  
ToaccessyouronlineAlbumsoptionsfromyourPCSVisionPhone:  
1. Display the album list in the online Picture Mail menu (see  
“Managing Online Picture Mail From Your PCS Vision Phone”  
on page 170).  
2. Use your navigation key to select an album (or Uploads).  
3. Press Options (right softkey) to display options.  
4. To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
CreateAlbum to create a new album. Enter a new album  
name and press Save (left softkey).  
DeleteAlbum to delete the selected album.  
Rename Album to rename the selected album. Enter a new  
name and press Save (left softkey).  
Note: Uploads cannot be erased or renamed.  
AlbumInfo to display album information:name, created  
time/date, and the number of stored pictures.  
Section 2K: Using Your Phone’s Built-in Camera  
173  
Section 3  
PCS Service Features  
Section 3A  
PCS Service Features: The Basics  
In This Section  
UsingVoicemail  
UsingCallerID  
RespondingtoCallWaiting  
MakingaThree-WayCall  
UsingCallForwarding  
Nowthatyou’vemasteredyourphone’sfundamentals, it’stimetoexplore  
thecallingfeaturesthatenhanceyourPCSService. This section  
outlines your basic PCS Service features.  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
175  
Using Voicemail  
Setting Up YourVoicemail  
All unanswered calls to your PCS Vision Phone are automatically  
transferred to your voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned  
off. Therefore, you will want to set up your PCS Voicemail and  
personal greeting as soon as your PCS Vision Phone is activated.  
Tosetupyourvoicemail:  
1. Press and hold  
.
2. Follow the system prompts to:  
Create your passcode  
Record your greeting  
Record your name announcement  
Choose whether or not to activate One-Touch Message  
Access (a feature that lets you access messages and  
bypassing the need for you to enter your passcode)  
Note: The voicemail setup process may vary in certain Affiliate areas.  
Voicemail Notification  
There are several ways your PCS Vision Phone alerts you of a  
new message:  
By displaying a message on the screen.  
By sounding the assigned ringer type.  
By the LED blinking red.  
By displaying  
at the top of your screen.  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
176  
NewVoicemail MessageAlerts  
When you receive a new voice message, your phone alerts you and  
prompts you to call your voicemail.  
Tocallyourvoicemail:  
Press  
.
TodisplayyourMissedLog:  
Press  
or OK (left softkey).  
Important: When you are roaming off the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, you  
may not receive notification of new voicemail messages. It is recommended that  
you periodically check your voicemail by dialing 1 + area code + your PCS Phone  
Number. When your voicemail answers, press  
and enter your passcode.  
You will be charged roaming rates when accessing voicemail while roaming off  
the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.  
Note: Your phone accepts messages even when it is turned off. However, you are  
only notified of new messages when your phone is turned on and you are in a  
PCS Service Area.  
RetrievingYourVoicemail Messages  
You can review your messages directly from your PCS Vision Phone or  
from any other touch-tone phone. To dial from your PCS Vision Phone,  
you can either speed dial your voicemail or use the menu keys.  
UsingOne-TouchMessageAccess  
Press and hold  
. (Your phone will dial your voicemail box.)  
UsingtheMenuKeysonYourPhonetoAccessYourMessages  
1. Press to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select Voicemail and press  
.
4. Select CallVoicemail and press  
.
Note: You are charged for airtime minutes when you are accessing your  
voicemail from your PCS Vision Phone.  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
177  
UsingaPhoneOtherThanYourPCSVisionPhoneto  
AccessMessages  
1. Dial your PCS Phone number.  
2. When your voicemail answers, press  
.
3. Enter your passcode.  
Tip: When you call into voicemail you first hear the header information (date,  
time, and sender information) for the message. To skip directly to the message,  
press  
during the header.  
VoicemailButtonGuide  
Here’s a quick guide to your keypad functions while listening to  
voicemail messages. For further details and menu options, see  
“Voicemail Menu Key” on page 182.  
Date/Time Send Reply Advance  
Replay  
Erase  
Rewind  
Call Back  
Help  
Forward  
Save  
Cancel  
Skip  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
178  
Voicemail Options  
Your PCS Vision Phone offers several options for organizing and  
accessing your voicemail.  
UsingExpertMode  
Using the Expert Mode setting for your personal voicemail box helps  
you navigate through the voicemail system more quickly by  
shortening the voice prompts you hear at each level.  
ToturnExpertModeonoroff:  
1. Press and hold  
to access your voicemail. (If your voicemail  
box contains any new or saved messages, press  
to access  
the main voicemail menu.)  
2. Press  
to change your Personal Options, following the  
system prompts.  
3. Press  
for Expert Mode.  
4. Press  
to turn Expert Mode on or off.  
SettingUpGroupDistributionLists  
Create up to 20 separate group lists, each with up to 20 customers.  
1. Press and hold  
to access your voicemail. (If your voicemail  
box contains any new or saved messages, press  
the main voicemail menu.)  
to access  
2. Press  
to change your Personal Options, following the  
system prompts.  
3. Press  
for Administrative Options.  
for Group Distribution Lists.  
4. Press  
5. Follow the voice prompts to create, edit, rename, or delete  
group lists.  
PCSCallback  
Return a call after listening to a message without disconnecting  
from voicemail.  
Press  
after listening to a message. (Once the call is  
complete, you’re returned to the voicemail main menu.)  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
179  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessage  
Record and send a voice message to other PCS Voicemail users.  
1. From the main voicemail menu, press  
to send a message.  
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter the phone number.  
3. Follow the voice prompts to record and send your voice  
message.  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessageReply  
Reply to a voice message received from any other PCS Voicemail user.  
1. After listening to a voice message, press  
.
2. Follow the voice prompts to record and send your reply.  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessageForwarding  
Forward a voice message, except those marked “Private,” to other  
PCS Voicemail users.  
1. After listening to a message, press  
.
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter the phone number.  
3. Follow the voice prompts to record your introduction and  
forward the voice message.  
Voicemail-to-VoicemailReceiptRequest  
Receive confirmation that your voice message has been listened to  
when you send, forward, or reply to other PCS users.  
1. After you have recorded a message, press  
to indicate you  
are satisfied with the message you recorded.  
2. Press  
to mark receipt requested.  
3. Press  
to send your voicemail message.  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
180  
ContinueRecording  
When leaving a voice message, you can choose to continue recording  
even after you’ve stopped.  
Before pressing  
to indicate that you are satisfied with the  
message you recorded, press  
to continue recording.  
ExtendedAbsenceGreeting  
When your phone is turned off or you are off the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network for an extended period, this greeting can be played  
instead of your normal personal greeting.  
1. From the main voicemail menu, press  
for Personal  
Options.  
2. Press  
for Greetings.  
to record an Extended Absence Greeting.  
3. Press  
Clearing the Message Icon  
Your phone may temporarily continue to display the message icon  
after you have checked your voice and text messages.  
Tocleartheiconfromthedisplayscreen:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
3. Select Voicemail and press  
4. Select ClearCount and press  
.
.
.
5. Select Yes and press  
.
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
181  
Voicemail Menu Key  
Following the prompts on the voicemail system, you can use your  
keypad to navigate through the voicemail menu. The following list  
outlines your phone’s voicemail menu structure.  
Listen  
Envelope Information  
Reply  
Advance 8 Seconds  
Replay  
Rewind  
Forward Message  
Erase  
Callback  
Save  
Options  
Send a Message  
Personal Options  
Notification Options  
Phone Notification  
Numeric Paging to a PCS Phone  
Return to Personal Options Menu  
Administrative Options  
Skip Pass code  
Autoplay  
Message Date & Time On/Off  
Change Pass code  
Group Distribution List  
Return to Personal Options Menu  
Greetings  
Personal Greetings  
Name Announcement  
Extended Absence Greeting  
Return to Personal Options Menu  
Expert Mode (On/Off)  
Place a Call  
Disconnect  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
182  
Using Caller ID  
Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before answering the  
phone by displaying the number of the incoming call. If you do not  
want your number displayed when you place a call, just follow these  
easy steps.  
Toblockyourphonenumberfrombeingdisplayedforaspecific  
outgoingcall:  
1. Press  
2. Enter the number you want to call.  
3. Press  
.
.
To permanently block your number, call PCS Customer Solutions.  
Responding to CallWaiting  
When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you of incoming calls by  
sounding two beeps. Your phone’s screen informs you that another  
call is coming in and displays the caller’s phone number (if it is  
available and you are in digital mode).  
Torespondtoanincomingcallwhileyou’reonacall:  
Press  
(or press Options [right softkey], highlight Flash, and  
press ). (This puts the first caller on hold and answers the  
second call.)  
Toswitchbacktothefirstcaller:  
Press  
again (or press Options [right softkey], highlight  
Flash, and press ).  
Tip: For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted, you can temporarily  
disable Call Waiting by pressing  
before placing your call.  
Call Waiting is automatically reactivated once you end the call.  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
183  
Making a Three-Way Call  
With Three-Way Calling, you can talk to two people at the same time.  
When using this feature, the normal airtime rates will be charged for  
each of the two calls.  
TomakeaThree-WayCall:  
1. Enter a number you wish to call and press  
or  
.
2. Once you have established the connection, press  
(or press  
Options [right softkey], highlight Three-WayCall, and press ).  
(This puts the first caller on hold.)  
3. Dial the second number you wish to call and press  
(or  
press Options [right softkey], highlight Call or Call:SpeakerOn,  
and press ).  
4. When you’re connected to the second party, press  
again  
(or press Options [right softkey], highlight Flash, and press  
)
to begin your three-way call.  
If one of the people you called hangs up during your call, you and the  
remaining caller stay connected. If you initiated the call and are the  
first to hang up, all three callers are disconnected.  
Tip: You can also begin a Three-Way Call by displaying a phone number stored in  
your Contacts, Call History, or Messaging. To call the third party, press  
step 3 above.  
during  
Note: Call Waiting and Three-Way Calling are not available while roaming off the  
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
184  
Using Call Forwarding  
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls to another  
phone number – even when your phone is turned off. You can  
continue to make calls from your phone when Call Forwarding is  
activated.  
ToactivateCallForwarding:  
1. Press  
.
2. Enter the area code and phone number to which your future  
calls should be forwarded.  
3. Press  
. (You will hear a tone to confirm the activation of  
Call Forwarding.)  
TodeactivateCallForwarding:  
1. Press  
.
2. Press  
. (You will hear a tone to confirm the deactivation.)  
Note: You are charged a higher rate for calls you have forwarded.  
Note: PCS Ready Link calls cannot be forwarded. If Call Forwarding is activated,  
incoming PCS Ready Link calls will not be completed.  
Section 3A: PCS Service Features – The Basics  
185  
Section 3B  
SM  
PCS Vision  
In This Section  
GettingStartedWithPCSVision  
UnderstandingMessaging  
UsingEmail  
 AccessingGames  
 AccessingRingers  
 AccessingScreenSavers  
AccessingAlternateEmailProviders 
 ExploringtheWeb  
UsingInstantMessaging  
 UsingPCSBusinessConnection  
ExperiencingWirelessOnlineChat 
 PCSVisionFAQs  
DownloadingPremiumServicesContent  
SM  
PCS Vision bringsyouclarityyoucanseeandhearwithadvanced  
multimediaservices. These features, including PCS Messaging,  
games, downloadable ringers and screen savers, Web access, and  
SM  
PCS Business Connection are easy to learn and use. The rich,  
colorful graphic experience is visually comparable to your home or  
office computer. Clearly, it’s a whole new way to look at wireless.  
This section introduces these advanced services and walks you  
through the necessary steps to start taking advantage of PCS Vision.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
186  
Getting StartedWith PCSVision  
With your PCS Vision Phone and PCS Service, you are ready to start  
enjoying the advantages of PCS Vision. This section will help you  
learn the basics of using your PCS Vision services, including  
managing your User Name, launching a Vision connection, and  
navigating the Web with your PCS Vision Phone.  
Your User Name  
When you buy a PCS Vision Phone and sign up for service, you’re  
automatically assigned a User Name. A User Name is typically based  
on your name and a number, followed by “@sprintpcs.com.” For  
example, the third John Smith to sign up for PCS Vision services  
might have [email protected] as his User Name. If you want a  
particular User Name, you can visit www.sprintpcs.com and get the  
name you want – as long as nobody else has it.  
When you use PCS Vision services, your User Name is submitted to  
identify you to the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. The User Name  
is also useful as an address for Email, as a way to personalize Web  
services, and as an online virtual identity.  
Your User Name will be automatically programmed into your  
PCS Vision Phone. You don’t have to enter it.  
UpdatingYourUserName  
When you change the programmed User Name and select a new one,  
you have to update your User Name through your PCS Phone.  
ToupdateyourUserName:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
.
3. Select PCSVision and press  
.
4. Select UpdateProfile and press  
.
If you want to cancel, press  
while processing.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
187  
FindingYourUserName  
If you aren’t sure what your PCS Vision User Name is, you can easily  
find it online or on your PCS Vision Phone.  
TofindyourUserName:  
Atwww.sprintpcs.com. Sign on to your account using your  
PCS Phone Number and password. To view your PCS Vision User  
Name, click on the MyPersonalInformation menu and then click  
PCSVisionUserName.  
OnyourPCSVisionPhone. To find your User Name, access your  
phone’s main menu, go to Settings > PhoneInfo > Phone#/UserID.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
188  
Launching a PCSVision Connection  
TolaunchaPCSVisionconnection:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Web and press . (Your PCS Vision connection will  
launch and the PCS Vision Home page will display.)  
The PCS Vision Home Page  
Vision Home  
Personalize with  
Downloads  
1. Messaging  
2. Downloads  
3. News  
4. Weather  
5. Sports  
6. Entertainment  
Go  
Shortcut: You can also press Web (right softkey) in standby mode.  
Note: If Net Guard is enabled and displayed (see the next page), press OK (left  
softkey) to continue and launch the Web.  
Tip: When Ready Link Guard is set to On, a warning message will appear.  
Press Continue (left softkey) to continue. (See page 149 for Ready Link Guard.)  
While connecting, the following will appear on the screen:  
Connecting...Pleasewait..  
If you had a previous PCS Vision connection, the last page you visited  
(for example, Email or ESPN Top News) will display when you launch  
your browser. When this occurs, you may not see the “Connecting...”  
message when you launch the session. Though the browser is open,  
you are not currently in an active data session - that is, no data is being  
sent or received. As soon as you navigate to another page, the active  
session will launch and you will see the “Connecting...” message.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
189  
Net Guard  
When you first connect to the Web, the Net Guard will appear to  
confirm that you want to connect. This feature helps you avoid  
accidental connections. You can disable the Net Guard in the future  
by selecting AlwaysAuto-Connect when the Net Guard is displayed.  
TochangeyourNetGuardsettings:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Settings and press  
3. Select PCSVision and press  
4. Select NetGuard and press  
.
.
.
5. Select On or Off and press  
.
On to activate the Net Guard.  
Off to deactivate the Net Guard.  
Note: When enabled, the Net Guard appears only once per session. The Net  
Guard does not appear if the phone is merely re-connecting due to a time-out.  
PCSVision Connection Status and Indicators  
Your phone’s display lets you know the current status of your  
PCS Vision connection through indicators which appear at the top  
of the screen. The following symbols are used:  
Your PCS Vision connection is active (data is being transferred);  
the transmit/receive symbol will blink to indicate data  
transmission. Incoming voice calls go directly to voicemail;  
outgoing voice calls can be made, but the PCS Vision  
connection will terminate.  
Your PCS Vision connection is dormant (no data is being sent  
or received). Though not currently active, when dormant the  
phone can restart an active connection quickly; voice calls can  
be made and received.  
Your phone is not currently able to access PCS Vision service  
features.  
If no indicator appears, your phone does not have a current  
PCS Vision connection. To launch a connection, see “Launching a  
PCS Vision Connection” on the previous page.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
190  
Navigating the Web  
Navigating through menus and Websites during a PCS Vision  
session is easy once you’ve learned a few basics. Here are some tips  
for getting around:  
Softkeys  
During a PCS Vision session, the bottom line of your phone’s display  
contains one or more softkeys. These keys are shortcut controls for  
navigating around the Web, and they correspond to the softkey  
buttons directly below the phone’s display screen.  
Tip: Depending on which Websites you visit, the labels on the softkeys may  
change to indicate their function.  
Tousesoftkeys:  
Press the desired softkey button. (If an additional pop-up menu  
appears when you press the softkey button, select the menu  
items using your keypad [if they’re numbered] or by  
highlighting the option and pressing .)  
1. Messaging  
2. Downloads  
3. News  
4. Weather  
5. Sports  
6. Entertainment  
7. Money  
8. Find if...  
9. Portals  
10. My Account  
left softkey  
Scrolling  
Go  
right softkey  
As with other parts of your phone’s menu, you’ll have to scroll up and  
down to see everything on some Websites.  
ToscrolllinebylinethroughWebsites:  
Press the navigation key up or down.  
ToscrollpagebypagethroughWebsites:  
Press the volume buttons on the side of the phone.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
191  
Selecting  
Once you’ve learned how to use softkeys and scroll, you can start  
navigating the Web.  
Toselecton-screenitems:  
Use the navigation key to highlight the desired item, then press  
the desired softkey button (or press  
).  
Tip: You’ll find that the left softkey is used primarily for selecting items. This  
softkey is often labeled “Go.”  
Tip: If the items on a page are numbered, you can use your keypad (number keys)  
to select an item. (The tenth item in a numbered list may be selected by pressing  
the  
key on your phone’s keypad, even though the number 0 doesn’t appear  
on the screen.)  
Links allow you to jump to different Web pages, select special  
functions, or even place phone calls.  
Toselectlinks:  
Highlight the link and select the appropriate softkey.  
GoingBack  
Togobackonepage:  
Press the  
key on your phone.  
Note: The keyisalsousedfordeletingtext(likeaBACKSPACEkey)whenyou  
are entering text.  
GoingHome  
ToreturntothePCSVisionHomepagefromanyotherWebpage:  
Press the right softkey, then highlight Home and press  
OK (left softkey).  
Tip: You can also return to the PCS Vision Home page by pressing and holding  
the  
key.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
192  
PCS Messaging  
Understanding Messaging  
Now you can send and receive emails and text messages and  
participate in Web-based chatrooms right from your PCS Vision  
Phone. Messaging allows you to stay connected to friends, family,  
and co-workers 24 hours a day anywhere on the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network.  
Note: In some instances, when you receive a text message, characters with  
accents will be displayed as question marks.  
MessageTypes  
There are many types of text messaging available on your phone.  
These appear on your screen as Notifications and include numeric  
messages (pages), Messages, Updates, and Mail.  
(PCS Voicemail provides voicemail-to-mailbox messaging.  
For information on using your phone’s voicemail feature, see  
“Using Voicemail” on page 176.)  
New Messages  
When you receive a new Message, your phone will alert you.  
Press View (left softkey) to display the message details.  
Press Call (left softkey) to dial the phone number. (Appears when  
a phone number is highlighted.)  
Press Reply (left softkey) to reply to the message. (Appears when  
a phone number or email address is highlighted.)  
Press Go (left softkey) to go to the Website. (Appears when a URL  
is highlighted.)  
Press Forward (left softkey) to forward the message. (Appears  
only if there are no phone numbers or URLs in the message.)  
Press Options (right softkey) to display options. (See page 197 for  
details.)  
Tip: When you highlight a phone number, the left softkey may display Call or  
Reply depending on the circumstance.  
Tip: To make a Ready Link call from the message, press and hold  
applicable).  
(if  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
193  
Message Storage  
Your PCS Phone can store up to 200 received and 180 sent Messages.  
When the message memory is full, the oldest unlocked message will  
be deleted automatically. (See page 198 for locking messages.)  
Displaying Messages  
To display a Message from the message notification alert, see “New  
Messages” on the previous page.  
TodisplayaMessagefromthemainmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsg and press . (The folder list appears.)  
4. Select Inbox, Sent, Outbox, Drafts, or your defined folder and  
press . (The message list appears.)  
5. Highlight the header of the message you want to see and  
press . (The message detail appears.)  
If the sender’s or addressee’s information has already been stored in  
the Contacts list, the corresponding name or phone number appears  
as the header of the message.  
Toreadothermessages:  
Press the navigation key left to read the previous message.  
Press the navigation key right to read the next message.  
Displaying Picture Mail  
When you receive a Picture Mail, your phone will save it into the  
Picture Mail Inbox automatically.  
TodisplayaPicturefromthemainmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select PictureMail and press  
.
4. Select Inbox and press  
.
5. Select your desired message and press  
.
6. Highlight the URL in the message and press Go (left softkey).  
(The browser will launch and display the picture.)  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
194  
Sending a Message  
With Messaging, you can use a person’s wireless phone number to  
send and receive text messages from your PCS Vision Phone to their  
messaging-ready phone – and they can send messages to you. When  
you receive a new message, you’ll automatically be notified with a  
two-way text message.  
Tosendatextmessage:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
3. Select SendMessage and press  
4. Select TextMessage and press  
.
.
.
5. Select FromPhoneBook, MobilePhone#, or EmailAddress and  
press  
to enter recipients.  
FromPhoneBook to select a recipient from your Contacts list.  
Highlight an entry and press to select. Or select  
<AddEntry> to enter a new entry. Press Done (left softkey)  
when you are finished selecting/entering recipients.  
MobilePhone# to enter a mobile phone number directly.  
EmailAddress to enter an email address directly.  
6. To add a recipient, press Options (right softkey), select  
AddRecipients, and press  
.
Edit to edit the selected entry.  
Erase to erase the selected entry.  
EraseAll to erase all entries you have selected/entered.  
AddRecipient to add recipients.  
7. Press Next (left softkey) when you are finished selecting/entering  
recipients (you may include up to 10 recipients).  
8. To enter a message, select the box under Message and press  
.
9. Use your keypad to enter a text message (or press Mode [right  
softkey] to select from PresetMessages or RecentMessages),  
and press OK (left softkey).  
10. To set the message priority, select the box under Priority and  
press  
11. Select Ordinary or Urgent and press  
Tip: If you select Urgent, the message will be sent with  
12. Press Send (left softkey) to send the message.  
.
.
.
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
195  
To change the recipients or to save the message as a draft, press  
Options (right softkey) and select an option from the following during  
steps 7-11 on the previous page.  
ChgRecipients to change Recipients.  
SendCallback# to select from None, MyPhone#, or Other to notify  
your recipients of your callback number. (See “Setting a Callback  
Number” on page 62.)  
SavetoDrafts to save the message to a Drafts folder. (See below to  
edit and send the draft message.)  
Note: If there is a failure when sending a message in no-service area, you are  
prompted to select to send the message automatically. Press Yes (left softkey),  
and the message goes to the Outbox folder with . If you press No (right softkey),  
the message goes to the folder with . (See next page to send the message.)  
Sending a Message in the Drafts Folder  
Toeditandsendamessageinthedraftsfolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsg and press  
.
4. Select Drafts and press  
.
5. Select the message you wish to edit and press Edit (left softkey).  
6. After editing the message, press Send (left softkey) to send the  
message.  
Tip: The oldest message in the drafts folder will be erased when you save more  
than 10 messages.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
196  
Sending a Message in the Outbox Folder  
If a failure occurs when you try to send a message, the message goes  
to the Outbox folder.  
TosendamessagefromtheOutboxfolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsg and press  
.
4. Select Outbox and press  
.
5. Select the message you wish to send and press Send (left softkey).  
Message Options  
Several options are available when you display a folder list, message  
list, or message details.  
FolderListOptions  
Select Inbox, Sent, Outbox, Drafts, or your defined folder and press  
Options (right softkey). To select an option, highlight it and press  
.
EditFolder to edit the folder (user-defined folder only).  
EraseFolder to erase the folder (user-defined folder only).  
CreateFolder to create a new user-defined folder.  
ComposeNew to compose a new message.  
EraseMessages to erase messages (if applicable).  
MessageListOptions  
To display a message list, select Inbox (or defined folder), Sent, Outbox,  
or Drafts and press . To display your Picture Mail message list,  
select PictureMail from the Messaging menu, press , select Inbox,  
and press . Then highlight a message and press Options (right  
softkey) to display options.  
Reply to reply to the message. (See page 195 to send a message.)  
(Inbox only.)  
Forward to forward the message. Select from FromPhoneBook,  
MobilePhone#, or EmailAddress. (Inbox and Sent only.)  
Edit to edit a message. (Outbox and Drafts only.)  
Send to send a message. (Outbox and Drafts only.)  
Move to move a message to the Inbox or to your defined folder.  
Select a folder and press , or press <AddFolder> to create a new  
folder. (See page 200 to create a folder.) (Inbox only.)  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
197  
Lock to lock a message. Locked messages will not be erased  
automatically. To unlock the message, select Unlock and press  
(Picture Mail Inbox, Inbox, and Sent only.)  
.
ComposeNew to compose a new message. (See page 195 to  
compose a new message.)  
Erase to erase the selected message.  
EraseReadMsgs to erase read messages in the folder (except  
locked messages). (Picture Mail Inbox, Inbox only.)  
EraseAll toeraseallmessagesinthefolder(exceptlockedmessages).  
A warning message appears if there are unread messages.  
Tip: Locked messages will be displayed with  
.
Tip: To make a call from the list, highlight a message and press  
applicable).  
or  
(if  
MessageDetailsOptions  
After you display the Message list in the Picture Mail Inbox, Inbox,  
Sent, or your defined folder, press to display the message details.  
Press Options (right softkey) to display message options. To select an  
option, highlight it and press  
.
Call(GotoList) to call a number in the message. Select a number  
and press or Call (left softkey) to place a call. Press and hold  
to make a Ready Link call.  
Call:SpeakerOn to call in speaker mode. Select a number and  
or Call (left softkey) to place a call. Press and hold  
to make a  
Ready Link call.  
Prepend to add numbers to the beginning of the phone number (if  
applicable).  
GotoURLList to display URLs in the message. Press Go (left  
softkey) or select a URL and press  
to go to the site.  
SendMessage to display phone numbers and email addresses to  
send a message. (See page 195 for details.) (Except Picture Mail)  
Reply to reply to the message. (See page 195 to send a message.)  
(Message in Inbox and defined folder only.)  
Forward to forward the message. Select from FromPhoneBook,  
MobilePhone#, or EmailAddress. (Except Picture Mail)  
Move to move the message to another folder. Select a folder and  
press  
or press <AddFolder> to create a new folder.  
(See page 200 to create a folder.) (Message in Inbox and defined  
folder only.)  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
198  
Lock to lock the message. Locked messages will not be erased  
automatically. To unlock the message, select Unlock and press  
FontSize to change the font size from Small or Normal.  
SavetoPh. Book to save the phone number, email address, and  
.
URLs. Select a data category and press  
to save.  
GotoPhoneBook to go to the Contacts list (if applicable).  
ComposeNew to compose a new message. (See page 195 to  
compose a message.)  
Erase to erase the message.  
Changing the Display Font Size of a Message  
After you display a Message (except in the Outbox and Drafts folder),  
press Options (right softkey) to display message options.  
Toadjustthedisplayfontsize:  
1. Select FontSize and press  
.
2. Select Small or Normal and press  
.
Prepending a Phone Number From a Message  
After you display a Message (except in the Outbox and Drafts folder),  
press Options (right softkey) to display message options.  
Toaddaprefixtoaphonenumber:  
1. Select Prepend and press  
.
2. Highlight your desired phone number and press  
or OK (left  
softkey).  
3. Enter the digits or pauses (see below) you want to add to the  
number.  
4. Press  
or  
to make a call.  
To select another option, press Options (right softkey), highlight it  
and press  
.
Call to dial the phone number.  
Call:SpeakerOn to dial the phone number in speakerphone  
mode.  
SavePhone# to store the phone number in your Contacts  
Directory.  
H HardPause to insert a hard pause. (See “Dialing and  
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 28.)  
T 2-Sec. Pause to insert a 2-second pause. (See “Dialing and  
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 28.)  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
199  
Message Folders  
Incoming Updates and numeric pages are stored in folders in your  
phone’s Messaging menu. You may add your own folders or use the  
phone’s default folder.  
You can create up to ten folders to store your Messages. When ten  
user-defined folders exist, the “Create Folder ”option will not appear.  
Toaddanewfolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsg and press  
.
4. Press Options (right softkey).  
5. Select CreateFolder and press  
.
6. Enter a folder name and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
Pressing Save (left softkey) allows you to save the folder  
name.  
7. If you want messages to be filed into the folder automatically,  
select the menu under AutoFiling and press  
8. Select On and press  
9. Select the box under Keyword by scrolling down and press  
.
.
.
10. Enter a keyword and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
11. Press Save (left softkey).  
Tosetanoptionalfeaturefortheaddedfolder:  
1. During step 9 above, scroll down to select other menu options.  
Highlight the menu under each item and press  
.
Notify to set the display notification to on or off when you  
have unread messages matching the defined folder.  
EnvelopeIcon to set the envelope icon display to on or off  
when you have unread messages matching the defined folder.  
2. After selecting each setting, press Save (left softkey).  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
200  
Toeditafolder:  
1. From the folder list display, highlight a defined folder.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
3. Select EditFolder and press  
.
4. Select the box you wish to edit and press  
.
5. Enter or select a new folder name/setting.  
6. Press  
or OK (left softkey).  
7. Press Save (left softkey).  
ErasingAll Messages  
Toeraseallmessageswithinafolder:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select TextMsg and press  
.
4. Select Inbox, Sent, Outbox, Drafts, or your defined folder and  
press  
.
5. Press Options (right softkey).  
6. Select EraseAll and press . (A confirmation will display.)  
7. Select Yes and press  
.
Moving a Message IntoAnother Folder  
You can move messages from the Inbox folder to a user-defined folder.  
Tomoveamessageintoanotherfolder:  
1. After you display a message in your Inbox folder, press Options  
(right softkey) to display the message options.  
2. Highlight Move and press  
.
3. Highlight your desired folder and press . (You must have at  
least one defined folder to move a message.)  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
201  
Erasing a Folder  
Toeraseatextmessagefolder:  
1. From the folder list display, highlight the defined folder you  
want to erase.  
2. Press Options (right softkey).  
3. Highlight EraseFolder and press  
4. Select Yes and press  
.
.
Note: When you erase a folder, the messages within the folder are also erased.  
If the folder contains a new (unread) message or locked message, you are  
prompted to select Erase or Don’t Erase.  
Erasing Selected Messages inAll Folders  
Toeraseselectedmessages:  
1. From the folder list display, press Options (right softkey).  
2. Select EraseMessages and press  
.
3. Select Read, Unread, and/or Sent and press  
to check the  
appropriate box(es).  
4. After selecting the boxes, press Done (left softkey).  
5. Select Erase and press  
to erase selected messages (except  
locked messages).  
Note: To erase an individual message, see “Message List Options” on page 197.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
202  
Signing Up for Updates  
With Updates, you can have news and information sent directly to  
your PCS Vision Phone at the times you choose.  
ToselecttheinformationyouwanttosendtoyourPCSVisionPhone:  
1. Log on to the Internet from your computer.  
2. Go to the site from which you want to receive information.  
®
®
(A few of the sites you can visit are America Online , Yahoo! ,  
®,  
®
MSN and eBay . The location where you request updates  
within each site will vary.)  
3. Where indicated on the site, input your 10-digit PCS Phone  
number followed by “@messaging.sprintpcs.com.” (For  
example: [email protected].)  
Upon completing the registration process, you should begin  
receiving updates on your PCS Vision Phone as requested.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
203  
Using Email  
With Email, you can set up an account at no additional charge and  
perform many of the typical email functions from your PCS Vision  
Phone that you can from your personal computer.  
You can manage your Email account from your PCS Vision Phone or  
from your personal computer at www.sprintpcs.com. You can also  
access other select email providers from the Web through your Email.  
Accessing Email Messages  
ToaccessEmailmessages:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Messaging and press  
.
3. Select GotoEmail and press . (If you’re a first-time user, your  
phone will prompt you to set up your Email account by  
establishing a User Name and password.)  
4. To view your messages, press Inbox (left softkey).  
5. Scroll to select the message you wish to read and press the left  
softkey.  
6. Once you’ve read a message, use the quick actions at the end of  
each message (Reply, ReplyAll, Forward, Erase, AddtoFolder,  
or Main).  
Composing Email Messages  
TocomposeanEmailmessage:  
1. From the Email menu (see steps 1-3 above), press Compose (left  
softkey).  
2. Scroll to select the address box and enter the address of the  
person to whom you ’re sending a message and press the left  
softkey.  
3. Scroll to select the message box and enter the subject and your  
message.  
4. Select Send when your message is ready to be delivered.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
204  
AccessingAlternate Email Providers  
With PCS Vision, you can use popular email services such as  
®
®
®
AOL Mail, Yahoo! Mail, MSN Hotmail, and EarthLink to keep in  
touch even while you’re on the go.  
UsingAlternate Email Providers  
ToaccessemailprovidersfromyourPCSVisionPhone:  
1. From the PCS Vision Home page, select Messaging.  
2. Select Email.  
3. Select an email provider, such as AOLMail, Yahoo!Mail, or  
EarthLink.  
4. Use your keypad to enter the required sign in information for  
the selected provider, such as user name, email address, and/or  
password, and select SignIn. (Your mailbox for the selected  
provider will display.)  
Note: The information required for sign in will vary depending on the email  
provider you are accessing.  
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to read, reply to, compose,  
send, and manage your email account.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
205  
Using Instant Messaging  
PCS Vision also provides you with access to popular instant  
®
messaging (IM) clients, including Yahoo! Messenger, and  
®
TM  
AOL Instant Messenger .  
Accessing Instant Messaging  
ToaccessinstantmessagingclientsfromyourPCSVisionPhone:  
1. From the PCS Vision Home page, select Messaging.  
2. SelectInstantMessaging.  
3. Select an email provider, such as AOLInstantMessenger or  
Yahoo!Messenger.  
4. Use your keypad to enter the required sign in information for  
the selected provider, such as user name and/or password, and  
select SignIn. (Your IM screen for the selected provider will  
display.)  
Note: The information required for sign in will vary depending on the instant  
messaging provider you are accessing.  
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to read, reply to, compose,  
send, and manage your IM account.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
206  
ExperiencingWireless Online Chat  
PCS Vision gives you the ability to join wireless chatrooms from  
your PCS Vision Phone, to send text messages and icons to chatroom  
participants, or to launch a one-on-one (private) chatroom.  
Toaccessachatroomfromthebrowser:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Highlight Web and press  
3. Select Messaging.  
4. Select Chat.  
.
5. Select Enter. (You will see a disclaimer for Wireless Chat.)  
6. SelectIAgreeto enter the Chat menu.  
7. Select a chatroom from the menu (for example, “Friends”  
or “Singles”).  
8. Use your keypad to enter a nickname and select Enter. (Once in  
the chatroom, you may scroll through the postings to read  
messages from other chatroom participants.)  
Topostamessage:  
1. During an active chatroom session, select Addtext.  
2. Enter your message.  
3. Select Send.  
Tosetupaprivatechatroom:  
1. During an active chatroom session, select 1->1.  
2. Select a chatter with whom you’d like to launch a private  
chatroom.  
Toexitachatroom:  
Select LeaveRoom.  
Note: To avoid inadvertent data usage charges, you should sign out of  
chatrooms when you are ready to exit.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
207  
Downloading Premium Services Content  
With PCS Vision and your new PCS Vision Phone, you have access to a  
dynamic variety of Premium Service content such as downloadable  
Games, Ringers, Screen Savers, and other applications. The basic  
steps required to access and download Premium Service content are  
outlined below.  
AccessingtheDownloadMenus  
ToaccessthePCSVisiondownloadmenus:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Select the type of file you wish to download (Games, Ringers,  
ScreenSavers, or Applications) and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Select GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and take  
you to the corresponding download menu.)  
ToaccessthePCSVisiondownloadmenusfromtheWebbrowser:  
From the PCS Vision Home page, select Games, Ringers, or  
ScreenSavers to go to the corresponding download menu.  
(For more information on navigating the Web, see “Navigating  
the Web” on page 191.)  
SelectinganItemtoDownload  
You can search for available items to download in a number of ways:  
Featured displays a rotating selection of featured items.  
BrowseCategory allows you to narrow your search to a general  
category, such as Movie/TV Themes for Ringers or College Logos  
for Screen Savers. (There may be several pages of available  
content in a list. Select Next9 to view additional items.)  
Search allows you to use your keypad to enter search criteria to  
locate an item. You may enter an entire word or title or perform a  
partial-word search (for example, entering “goo” returns “Good  
Ol’ Boy,The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly,and “Goofy - Club”).  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
208  
DownloadinganItem  
Once you’ve selected an item you wish to download, highlight it and  
press  
or OK (left softkey). You will see a summary page for the  
item including its title, the vendor, the download detail, the file size,  
and the cost. Links allow you to view the LicenseDetails page, which  
outlines the price, license type, and length of license for the  
download, and the TermsofUse page, which details the Premium  
Services Terms of Use and your responsibility for payment.  
Todownloadaselecteditem:  
1. From the information page, select Buy. (The item will download  
automatically. When the NewDownload screen appears, the  
item has been successfully downloaded to your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
2. Select an option to continue:  
Select Use (left softkey) to assign the downloaded item (or  
to launch, in the case of a game or application).  
Your PCS Vision session will end and you will be redirected  
to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Select Shop (right softkey) to browse for other items to  
download.  
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
209  
Games  
Accessing Games  
You can play a variety of entertaining and graphically-rich games on  
your PCS Vision Phone. New games are easy to download and play.  
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium  
Services Content” on page 208.  
DownloadingGames  
Todownloadanavailablegametoyourphone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Highlight Games and press  
.
4. Highlight GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
take you to the Games download menu.)  
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a game you wish  
to download. (For more information on navigating the Web, see  
“Navigating the Web” on page 191.)  
6. Select Buy from the item information page. (The game will  
download automatically. When the NewDownload screen  
appears, the game has been successfully downloaded to  
your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
7. Select an option to continue:  
Select Use (left softkey) to launch the downloaded game.  
Your PCS Vision session will end and you will be redirected  
to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Select Shop (right softkey) to browse for other items to  
download.  
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
210  
PlayingGames  
ToplayadownloadedgameonyourPCSVisionPhone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Highlight Games and press  
.
4. Select the game you wish to play and press  
5. Highlight Run and press  
.
.
6. Press OK (left softkey) if a prompt displays the days remaining  
on the game license.  
7. Follow the onscreen instructions to play the game.  
Toquitagame:  
1. When you are finished playing, press  
. (A prompt will  
display: “Resume the Application?”)  
2. Select Yes to continue playing.  
– or –  
Select No to exit.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
211  
Ringers  
Accessing Ringers  
You can personalize your PCS Vision Phone by downloading and  
assigning different ringers to numbers in your Contacts list.  
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium  
Services Content” on page 208.  
DownloadingRingers  
Todownloadanavailableringertoyourphone:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
.
3. Highlight Ringers and press  
4. Highlight GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
take you to the Ringers download menu.)  
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a ringer you  
wish to download. (For more information on navigating the  
Web, see “Navigating the Web” on page 191.)  
6. From the item information page, select Buy. (The ringer will  
download automatically. When the NewDownload screen  
appears, the ringer has been successfully downloaded to  
your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
7. Select an option to continue:  
Select Use (left softkey) to assign the downloaded ringer.  
Your PCS Vision session will end and you will be redirected  
to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Select Shop (right softkey) to browse for other items to  
download.  
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Note: You may store total of 1024 KB of downloaded data on your phone.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
212  
AssigningDownloadedRingers  
You can assign downloaded ringers directly from the Downloads  
menu or through your phone’s Settings menu.  
ToassignadownloadedringerfromtheDownloadsmenu:  
1. Press  
to access the main menu.  
2. Select Downloads and press  
.
3. Highlight Ringers and press  
.
4. Highlight a downloaded ringer and press  
5. Highlight Assign and press  
.
.
6. Highlight VoiceCalls, Voicemail, Messaging, Calendar,  
Start-upTone, Power-offTone or PhoneBook and press  
The following two items need an extra step:  
.
VoiceCalls requires you to highlight WithCallerID or  
NocallerID and press  
.
PhoneBook requires you to highlight the Contacts entry you  
want to assign and press  
.
(A message appears confirming that the ringer has been assigned.)  
ToassignadownloadedringerfromtheSettingsmenu:  
See “Selecting Ringer Types for Voice Calls” on page 36;  
see “Selecting Ringer Types for Voicemail” on page 38;  
see “Selecting Ringer Types for Messages” on page 39;  
see “Selecting Ringer Types for Calendar” on page 39;  
see “Setting a Start-up/Power-off Tone” on page 40;  
– or –  
see “Selecting a Ringer/Image Type for an Entry” on page 95.  
Note: You may assign a ringer to more than one type of call.  
PurchasingRingers  
You can purchase ringers directly from your phone by following the  
instructions on page 209 or through www.sprintpcs.com.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
213  
Screen Savers  
Accessing Screen Savers  
Download unique images to use as screen savers – or make it easy to  
tell who’s calling by assigning specific images to numbers in your  
Contacts list.  
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium  
Services Content” on page 208.  
DownloadingScreenSavers  
TodownloadanavailableScreenSavertoyourphone:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Highlight ScreenSavers and press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
4. Highlight GetNew and press . (The browser will launch and  
take you to the Screen Savers download menu.)  
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a Screen Saver  
you wish to download. (For more information on navigating the  
Web, see “Navigating the Web” on page 191.)  
6. From the item information page, select Buy. (The screen saver  
will download automatically. When the NewDownload screen  
appears, the screen saver has been successfully downloaded to  
your phone.)  
Note: If you have not previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to  
create your purchasing profile.  
7. Select an option to continue:  
Select Use (left softkey) to assign the downloaded screen  
saver. Your PCS Vision session will end and you will be  
redirected to the appropriate phone menu screen.  
Select Shop (right softkey) to browse for other items to  
download.  
Press  
to quit the browser and return to standby mode.  
Note: You may store total of 1024 KB of downloaded data on your phone.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
214  
AssigningDownloadedScreenSavers  
Downloaded Screen Savers may be assigned directly from the  
Downloads menu or through the Settings menu.  
ToassignadownloadedScreenSaverfromtheDownloadsmenu:  
1. Press  
2. Select Downloads and press  
3. Highlight ScreenSavers and press  
4. Highlight a downloaded Screen Saver and press  
5. Select Assign and press  
6. Highlight one of IncomingCalls, ScreenSaver, or PhoneBook and  
press  
to access the main menu.  
.
.
.
.
.
The following item needs an extra step:  
PhoneBook requires you to highlight your desired Contacts  
entry and press  
.
(A message appears confirming that the image has been assigned.)  
Note: Depending on the data, you can select where to assign downloaded images:  
Image data can be assigned to Incoming Calls, Screen Saver, or Phone Book.  
Animation data can be assigned to Standby, Outgoing Calls, or Service Search.  
Note: You may assign a Screen Saver to more than one task.  
PurchasingScreenSavers  
You can purchase Screen Savers directly from your phone by following  
the instructions on page 209, or through www.sprintpcs.com.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
215  
Web  
Exploring the Web  
With Web access on your PCS Vision Phone, you can browse full-  
color graphic versions of your favorite Websites, making it easier than  
ever to stay informed while on the go. Follow sports scores and  
breaking news and weather and shop on your PCS Vision Phone  
anywhere on the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.  
In addition to the features already covered in this section, the  
PCS Vision Home page offers access to these colorful, graphically  
rich Web categories. Many sites are available under more than one  
menu – choose the one that’s most convenient for you.  
News. Get up-to-the-minute news regarding finance, business,  
sports, and entertainment at sites like CNNtoGo, Bloomberg,  
USA Today, and Forbes.  
Weather. Access The Weather Channel to get current weather  
conditions and forecasts.  
Entertainment. Get the latest buzz on your favorite stars as well as  
movie and music reviews at Websites like E! Online, Pocket  
TM  
BoxOffice , and TastNtalk.  
Sports. Enjoy current news, statistics, and sports scores, as well as  
updates of events in progress at ESPN.com and other sports sites.  
Finance. Use Websites like Bloomberg, Fidelity, and Forbes to get  
stock quotes, make trades, and check your bank account online.  
Travel. Access flight information and make dining arrangements  
from travel Websites like Saber and Fodors.com.  
Shopping. Browse or purchase from popular shopping Websites  
like Amazon.com or Edmunds.  
Tools. Use tools like Switchboard to access yellow pages, white  
pages – even reverse phone number look-up or use Google to  
search for other Websites or images.  
BusinessLinks. Access your PCS Business Connection Personal or  
Enterprise Edition along with links to many business-related sites.  
MyAccount. Check minutes and PCS Vision usage, view your  
current invoice, or make a payment.  
Search. Use Google to search keywords, articles, and even images.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
216  
Using the Browser Menu  
Navigating the Web from your phone using the PCS Vision Home  
page is easy once you get the hang of it. For details on how to  
navigate the Web, select menu items, and more, see “Navigating the  
Web” on page 191.  
Although the PCS Vision Home page offers a broad and convenient  
array of sites and services for you to browse, not all sites are  
represented, and certain functions, such as going directly to specific  
Websites, are not available. For these and other functions, you will  
need to use the browser menu. The browser menu offers additional  
functionality to expand your use of the Web on your PCS Vision Phone.  
OpeningtheBrowserMenu  
The browser menu may be opened anytime you have an active  
PCS Vision session, from any page you are viewing.  
Toopenthebrowsermenu:  
Press (right softkey) from any page during an active  
PCS Vision session. (The browser menu will display.)  
(To launch a PCS Vision session, please see “Launching a  
PCS Vision Connection” on page 189.)  
Options available under the browser menu include:  
Home. Returns the browser to the PCS Vision Home page.  
Forward. Allows you to go forward to the pages you have visited.  
Markthispage. Allows you to create new bookmarks.  
ViewBookmarks. Allows you to view and access bookmarked sites.  
Search. Launches a Google search.  
ShowURL. Displays the URL (Website address) of the site you’re  
currently viewing.  
GotoURL.... Allows you to navigate directly to a Website by  
entering its URL (Website address).  
History. Displays the pages you have visited.  
Refreshthispage. Reloads the current Web page.  
More.... Displays the additional menu options. (Restart Browser,  
Send Page, and Preferences.)  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
217  
CreatingaBookmark  
Bookmarks allow you to store the address of your favorite Websites  
for easy access at a later time.  
Tocreateabookmark:  
1. Launch the Web page you want to mark.  
2. Press (right softkey) to go to the browser menu.  
3. Select Markthispage and press  
or OK (left softkey).  
Note: Bookmarking a page does not store the page contents, just its address.  
Some pages cannot be bookmarked. Whether a particular Web page may be  
marked is controlled by its creator.  
AccessingaBookmark  
Toaccessabookmark:  
1. Access the browser menu by pressing (right softkey).  
2. Select ViewBookmarks and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Highlight the bookmark you’d like to access and press  
or  
OK (left softkey) to go to the Website.  
EditingaBookmark  
Toeditabookmark:  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to access the  
browser menu.  
2. Select ViewBookmarks and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select the bookmark you wish to edit and press (right  
softkey).  
4. Select EditAddress or EditTitle and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Press Edit (right softkey), use your keypad to edit the address or  
title, and press OK (left softkey).  
6. To save the bookmark, press OK (left softkey).  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
218  
DeletingaBookmark  
Todeleteabookmark:  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to access the  
browser menu.  
2. Select ViewBookmarks and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Highlight the bookmark you wish to erase and press (right  
softkey).  
4. Select Delete and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Press Yes (right softkey).  
Tip: To delete all bookmarks, select Delete All during step 3 above.  
MovingaBookmark  
Tomoveabookmark:  
1. Access the ViewBookmarks menu as outlined above in steps 1-2,  
and press (right softkey).  
2. Select Reorder and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Highlight the bookmark you wish to move and press Move (left  
softkey).  
4. Move the bookmark to a new location by pressing the  
navigation key up or down and press Drop (left softkey).  
5. When you’re finished, press Finish (right softkey).  
GoingtoaSpecificWebsite  
TogotoaparticularWebsitebyenteringaURL(Websiteaddress):  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to display the  
browser menu.  
2. Select GotoURL... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select Address and press OK (left softkey).  
4. Press Edit (right softkey), use your keypad to enter the URL of  
the Website you wish to go to, and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Press OK (left softkey) to go to the Website.  
Note: Not all Websites are viewable on your phone.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
219  
ReloadingaWebPage  
Toreload(refresh)aWebpage:  
1. Launch the Web and press (right softkey) to display the  
browser menu.  
2. Select Refreshthispage and press OK (left softkey).  
RestartingtheWebBrowser  
If the Web browser appears to be malfunctioning or stops  
responding, you can usually fix the problem by simply restarting  
the browser.  
TorestarttheWebbrowser:  
1. From an active PCS Vision connection, press (right softkey)  
to display the browser menu.  
2. Select More... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select RestartBrowser and press OK (left softkey).  
SendingaWebPage  
This feature allows you to send a URL (Website address) you’re  
viewing through SMS text messaging.  
TosendaWebpage:  
1. From an active PCS Vision connection, press (right softkey)  
to display the browser menu.  
2. Select More... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select SendPage and press OK (left softkey).  
4. To complete and send a Web Page, follow steps 5-12 in  
“Sending a Message” on page 195.  
AdjustingtheBrowserSoundVolume  
Toadjustthebrowsersoundvolume:  
1. From an active PCS Vision connection, press (right softkey)  
to display the browser menu.  
2. Select More... and press OK (left softkey).  
3. Select Preferences and press OK (left softkey).  
4. Select SoundVolume and press OK (left softkey).  
5. Select your desired volume level by pressing the navigation key  
up or down and press  
.
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
220  
SM  
PCS Business Connection  
Using PCS Business Connection  
Personal Edition  
SM  
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition gives you secure,  
®
®
®
real-time access to your Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes  
company email, calendar, business directory, and personal contacts.  
You’ll have the features and functions of your Microsoft Outlook and  
Lotus Notes so you can view, create, reply to, and delete email;  
schedule appointments; and look up phone numbers in real time,  
anywhere on the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.  
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition delivers the  
following features:  
Businessemailaccess. Read, reply to, forward, delete, and  
compose your company email.  
Companydirectoryandcontacts. Search, view, call, and email  
contacts from your company’s directory. Do all this and add/edit  
your personal contacts.  
Workcalendar. Accept and decline meetings, view daily  
summaries and details, and navigate to various dates.  
Files/informationonyourPC. Browse folders, download, and  
view documents from any device using a PC browser or  
Pocket Internet Explorer.  
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition requires no hardware  
or software installation on your company’s network. Just install the  
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition software on your work  
PC. This allows data to be securely retrieved in real-time by your  
wireless device when connected to the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network. There is a monthly charge for PCS Business  
Connection and usage charges will also apply.  
When your work PC isn’t on, you can share connections with your co-  
workers so that you always have access to your email, calendar, and  
contacts. Your data remains secure behind the corporate firewall, and  
any changes you make on your wireless device are instantly updated on  
your company server without the need to synchronize.  
Additional PCS Business Connection solutions are available for your  
company. For more details, visit businessconnection.sprintpcs.com.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
221  
PCSVision FAQs  
HowwillIknowwhenmyphoneisreadyforPCSVisionservice?  
When your phone is ready, your User Address will be displayed in the  
Phone# UserID menu. Go to Settings > PhoneInfo > Phone#/UserID.  
HowdoIsign-inforthefirsttime?  
You are automatically signed in to access PCS Vision services when  
you turn on your phone.  
HowdoIknowwhenmyphoneisconnectedtoPCSVisionservices?  
Your phone automatically connects when PCS Vision service is used  
or an incoming message arrives. Your phone will also display the  
icon. (Connecting takes about 10-12 seconds.)  
CanImakecallsandusePCS Visionservicesatthesametime?  
You cannot use voice and PCS Vision services simultaneously. If you  
receive a call while PCS Vision service is active, the call will be  
forwarded to voicemail. You can place an outgoing call anytime, but  
it will interrupt any in-progress PCS Vision session.  
Whenismydataconnectionactive?  
Your connection is active when data is being transferred. Outgoing  
calls are allowed; incoming calls go directly to voicemail. When  
active, the (Sending) or (Receiving) indicator flashes on your  
phone’s display screen.  
Whenismydataconnectiondormant?  
If no data is received for 10 seconds, the connection goes dormant.  
When the connection is dormant, voice calls are allowed. (The  
connection may become active again quickly.) If no data is received  
for an extended period of time, the connection will terminate.  
CanIsignoutofdataservices?  
You can sign out without turning off your phone; however, you will  
not be able to browse the Web or use other PCS Vision services.  
While signed out, you can still place or receive phone calls, check  
voicemail, and use other voice services. You may sign in again at any  
time. To sign out, go to Settings > PCSVision > DisableVision in your  
phone’s menu.  
Section 3B: PCS Vision  
222  
Section 3C  
SM  
PCS Voice Command  
In This Section  
SM  
GettingStartedWithPCSVoiceCommand  
CreatingYourOwnAddressBook  
MakingaCallWithPCSVoiceCommand  
AccessingInformationUsingPCSVoiceCommand  
WithSprint, thefirstwirelessprovidertoofferinnovative  
PCSVoiceCommandtechnology, reachingyourfriends, family, and  
co-workershasneverbeeneasierespeciallywhenyou’reonthego.  
You can even listen to Web-based information such as news, stock  
quotes, weather, sports, and much more. Your voice does it all  
with PCS Voice Command.  
This section outlines the PCS Voice Command service.  
Section 3C: PCS Voice Command  
223  
SM  
Getting StartedWith PCS Voice Command  
With PCS Voice Command:  
You can store all your contacts’ phone numbers, so you can  
simply say the name of the person you want to call.  
There’s no need to punch in a lot of numbers, memorize  
voicemail passwords, or try to dial while you’re driving.  
You can call anyone in your address book – even if you don’t  
remember their phone number.  
It’sEasytoGetStarted  
Just dial  
from your PCS Vision Phone to activate the  
service and listen to the brief instructions directly from your  
phone. There is a monthly charge for PCS Voice Command.  
Note: Beginning Fall 2004, dial  
to activate your PCS Voice  
Command service. PCS Voice Command calls will still be made using  
.
CreatingYour OwnAddress Book  
You can program up to 500 names into your personal address book,  
with each name having up to five phone numbers. That’s 2,500  
phone numbers, and with the advanced technology of PCS Voice  
Command, you can have instant access to all of them.  
There are four ways to update your address book:  
UseVoiceRecordings. Simply dial  
and say, “Add name.”  
You will then be asked to say the name and number you want to  
add to your personal address book. Your address book can store  
up to 20 voice recorded names at once.  
OntheWeb. Go to www.talk.sprintpcs.com to receive a fully  
functional Web-based address book to create and update  
your contacts.  
UseanExistingAddressBook. Automatically merge address books  
SM  
from desktop software applications with Sprint Sync Services for  
no additional charge. Simply click on the “Click to synchronize”  
button within your PCS Voice Command personal address book  
CallDirectoryAssistance. If you don’t have a computer or Internet  
access handy, you can have PCS Directory Assistance look up  
phone numbers for you and automatically add them to your  
address book. Just say “Call operator” and we’ll add two names  
and numbers to your address book for our standard directory  
assistance charge.  
Section 3C: PCS Voice Command  
224  
Making a CallWith PCSVoice Command  
ToplaceacallwithPCSVoiceCommand:  
1. Press  
and create your address book once you’ve  
signed up for PCS Voice Command. (You’ll hear a tone followed  
by the prompt “Ready.)  
2. After the “Ready” prompt, simply say, in a natural voice,  
“Call” and the name of the person or the number you’d  
like to call. (For example, you can say, Call Jane Smith at work,”  
“Call John Baker on the mobile phone,” “Call 555-1234,” or  
“Call Bob Miller.”)  
3. Your request will be repeated and you will be asked to verify.  
Say “Yes” to call the number or person. (The number will  
automatically be dialed.) Say “No” if you wish to cancel.  
Tip: Keep in mind that PCS Voice Command recognizes not only your voice,  
but any voice, so that others can experience the same convenience if they use  
your phone.  
For more helpful hints on PCS Voice Command, including a list  
of recognized commands and an interactive tutorial, visit  
Accessing Information Using  
PCSVoice Command  
ToaccessinformationusingPCSVoiceCommand:  
1. Press  
.
2. Say “Call the Web.” (To access, listen to and respond to email,  
once email has been set up, say “Call My Email.”)  
3. Choose from a listing of information categories like news,  
weather, sports, and more.  
Note: PCS Voice Command is not available while roaming off the  
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.  
Section 3C: PCS Voice Command  
225  
Section 4  
Safety Guidelines  
and  
Warranty Information  
Section 4A  
Safety  
In This Section  
Getting the Most Out of Your Reception  
MaintainingSafeUseofandAccesstoYourPhone  
CaringfortheBattery  
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice  
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones  
Owner’sRecord  
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice  
PartofgettingthemostoutofyourPCSVisionPhoneislearninghowthe  
phoneworksandhowtocareforit. This section outlines performance  
and safety guidelines that help you understand the basic features of  
your phone’s operation.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
227  
Getting the Most Out ofYour Reception  
KeepingTabsonSignalStrength  
The quality of each call you make or receive depends on the signal strength in your  
area. Your phone informs you of the current signal strength by displaying a number  
of bars next to the signal strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger the  
signal. If you’re inside a building, being near a window may give you better  
reception.  
Understanding the Power Save Feature  
If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save  
feature is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it periodically rechecks  
service availability; you can also check it yourself by pressing any key. Anytime the  
Power Save feature is activated, a message is displayed on the screen. When a signal  
is found, your phone returns to standby mode.  
UnderstandingHowYourPhoneOperates  
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s turned on, it  
receives and transmits radiofrequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the  
system handling your call controls the power level. This power can range from  
0.01µ watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode.  
KnowingRadioFrequencySafety  
The design of your PCS Vision Phone complies with updated NCRP standards  
described below.  
In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI’s 1982  
standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than  
120 scientists, engineers and physicians from universities, government health  
agencies and industries developed this updated standard after reviewing the  
available body of research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August 1996, the FCC  
adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the  
guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and  
Measurements (NCRP).  
MaintainingYourPhone’sPeakPerformance  
There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone properly and  
maintaining safe, satisfactory service.  
Hold the phone with the antenna raised, fully-extended, and over your shoulder.  
Try not to hold, bend, or twist the phone’s antenna.  
Don’t use the phone if the antenna is damaged.  
Speak directly into the mouthpiece.  
Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your phone  
does get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove the battery.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
228  
Note:For the best care of your phone, only Sprint authorized personnel should service your  
phone and accessories. Faulty service may void the warranty.  
Maintaining Safe Use of andAccess to  
Your Phone  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS  
PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE  
UsingYourPhoneWhileDriving  
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free  
device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions.  
Remember that safety always comes first.  
When using your phone in the car:  
Get to know your phone and its features, such as speed dial  
and redial.  
When available, use a hands-free device.  
Position your phone within easy reach.  
Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend  
the call in heavy traffic or hazardous  
weather conditions.  
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving.  
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when stationary or  
before pulling into traffic.  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may divert your  
attention from the road.  
Dial  
to report serious emergencies. It’s free from your  
wireless phone.  
Use your phone to help others in emergencies.  
Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when  
necessary.  
Tip:Purchase an optional hands-free car kit at your local Sprint Store, or call the PCS Accessory  
SM  
Hotline at 1-800-974-2221 or by dialing  
on your PCS Vision Phone.  
FollowingSafetyGuidelines  
To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations  
in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may  
cause interference or danger.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
229  
UsingYourPhoneNearOtherElectronicDevices  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radiofrequency (RF) signals.  
However, RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded  
electronic equipment.  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic  
operating systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the  
manufacturer or their representative to determine if these systems are adequately  
shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any  
equipment that has been added to your vehicle.  
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and  
hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF signals.  
Note:Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission before using the  
phone near medical equipment.  
TurningOffYourPhoneBeforeFlying  
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference  
with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations  
require you to have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the  
plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations  
prohibit using your phone while the plane is in the air.  
TurningOffYourPhoneinDangerousAreas  
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone off when in a  
blasting area or in other areas with signs indicating two-way radios should be  
turned off. Construction crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off  
explosives.  
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a potentially explosive  
atmosphere. Although it’s rare, your phone and accessories could generate sparks.  
Sparks can cause an explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death.  
These areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:  
Fueling areas such as gas stations.  
Below deck on boats.  
Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.  
Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal  
powders.  
Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s  
engine.  
Note:Never transport or store flammable gas, liquid or explosives in the compartment of your  
vehicle that contains your phone or accessories.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
230  
RestrictingChildren’sAccesstoYourPhone  
Your phone is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt  
themselves and others, damage the phone or make calls that increase your  
PCS Invoice.  
Caring for the Battery  
ProtectingYourBattery  
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your battery’s  
performance.  
Use only Sprint-approved batteries and chargers. These chargers are designed to  
maximize battery life. Using other batteries or chargers voids your warranty and  
may cause damage.  
In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range  
from 32º F to 113º F (0º C to 45º C).  
Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such  
as the bathroom.  
Never dispose of the battery by incineration.  
Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.  
Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.  
The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of  
time.  
It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable  
performance. It can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.  
Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s  
best to follow these storage rules:  
Less than one month:  
4º F to 140º F (-20º C to 60º C)  
More than one month:  
4º F to 113º F (-20º C to 45º C)  
DisposalofLithiumIon(LiIon)Batteries  
For safe disposal options of your LiIon batteries, contact your nearest Sprint  
authorized service center.  
SpecialNote:Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the  
disposal of batteries in household or business trash may  
be prohibited.  
Note:For safety, do not handle a damaged or leaking LiIon battery.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
231  
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the  
FCC Notice  
FCC Notice  
This phone may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to  
receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop using the phone if such  
interference cannot be eliminated.  
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (propane or butane) must comply with the  
National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact  
the National Fire Protections Association, One Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA  
02269, Attn.: Publication Sales Division.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly approved in this  
document could void your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas and chargers. The  
use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the phone  
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the phone.  
Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be  
broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending or sitting on it.  
Body-WornOperation  
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a handset on  
your body, use the Sprint supplied or approved carrying case, holster or other  
body-worn accessory. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, ensure the antenna  
is at least 1.9 cm from your body when transmitting. Use of non-Sprint approved  
accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.  
For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC Website at www.fcc.gov.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
232  
SpecificAbsorptionRates(SAR)forWirelessPhones  
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in  
the head of a user of a wireless handset.  
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring and  
calculation process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All  
phone models are tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But  
when in operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than the level  
reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to  
a base station antenna, phone design and other factors. What is important to  
remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do  
not represent a variation in safety.  
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial  
margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model  
phones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard  
of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.  
The highest reported SAR values of the PM-8200 are:  
AMPS/CDMAmodes(Part22):  
Head: 1.30 W/kg; Body-worn: 1.01 W/kg  
PCSmode(Part24):  
Head: 1.13 W/kg; Body-worn: 1.01 W/kg  
FCCRadiofrequencyEmission  
This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines.  
FCC ID number: AEZSCP-82H. More information on the phone’s SAR can be found  
from the following FCC Website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
233  
Consumer Information onWireless Phones  
(The following information comes from a consumer information Website jointly  
sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC), entitled “Cell Phone Facts: Consumer  
Information on Wireless Phones.” The information reproduced herein is dated  
July 29, 2003. For further updates, please visit the Website:  
Whatisradiofrequencyenergy(RF)?  
Radiofrequency (RF) energy is another name for radio waves. It is one form of  
electromagnetic energy that makes up the electromagnetic spectrum. Some of  
the other forms of energy in the electromagnetic spectrum are gamma rays, x-  
rays and light. Electromagnetic energy (or electromagnetic radiation) consists of  
waves of electric and magnetic energy moving together (radiating) through  
space. The area where these waves are found is called an electromagnetic field.  
Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical charges in antennas.  
As they are created, these waves radiate away from the antenna. All  
electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light. The major differences  
between the different types of waves are the distances covered by one cycle of  
the wave and the number of waves that pass a certain point during a set time  
period. The wavelength is the distance covered by one cycle of a wave. The  
frequency is the number of waves passing a given point in one second. For any  
electromagnetic wave, the wavelength multiplied by the frequency equals the  
speed of light. The frequency of an RF signal is usually expressed in units called  
hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per second. One kilohertz (kHz) equals one  
thousand waves per second, one megahertz (MHz) equals one million waves per  
second, and one gigahertz (GHz) equals one billion waves per second.  
RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about 3000 waves per  
second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second (300 GHz). Microwaves are a  
subset of radio waves that have frequencies ranging from around 300 million  
waves per second (300 MHz) to three billion waves per second (3 GHz).  
Howisradiofrequencyenergyused?  
Probably the most important use of RF energy is for telecommunications. Radio  
and TV broadcasting, wireless phones, pagers, cordless phones, police and fire  
department radios, point-to-point links and satellite communications all rely on  
RF energy.  
Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar, industrial heaters and  
sealers, and medical treatments. RF energy, especially at microwave  
frequencies, can heat water. Since most food has a high water content,  
microwaves can cook food quickly. Radar relies on RF energy to track cars and  
airplanes as well as for military applications. Industrial heaters and sealers use  
RF energy to mold plastic materials, glue wood products, seal leather items such  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
234  
as shoes and pocketbooks, and process food. Medical uses of RF energy include  
pacemaker monitoring and programming.  
Howisradiofrequencyradiationmeasured?  
RF waves and RF fields have both electrical and magnetic components. It is  
often convenient to express the strength of the RF field in terms of each  
component. For example, the unit “volts per meter” (V/m) is used to measure  
the electric field strength, and the unit “amperes per meter” (A/m) is used to  
express the magnetic field strength. Another common way to characterize an RF  
field is by means of the power density. Power density is defined as power per  
unit area. For example, power density can be expressed in terms of milliwatts  
(one thousandth of a watt) per square centimeter (mW/cm2 or microwatts (one  
millionth of a watt) per square centimeter (µW/cm2).  
The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually absorbed by the  
body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy. It is usually expressed in units of watts per  
kilogram (W/kg) or milliwatts per gram (mW/g).  
WhatbiologicaleffectscanbecausedbyRFenergy?  
The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not be confused with the  
effects from other types of electromagnetic energy.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays and gamma  
rays can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process where electrons are  
stripped away from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.  
Ionization only occurs with very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as  
X-rays and gamma rays. Often the term radiation is used when discussing  
ionizing radiation (such as that associated with nuclear power plants).  
The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy, including both radio  
waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause the ionization of atoms  
and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other  
types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation (heat) and  
other forms of electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage tissues and  
increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are  
particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood flow  
in them to carry away excess heat.  
The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the general public is too  
low to produce significant heating or increased body temperature. Still, some  
people have questions about the possible health effects of low levels of RF  
energy. It is generally agreed that further research is needed to determine what  
effects actually occur and whether they are dangerous to people. In the  
meantime, standards-setting organizations and government agencies are  
continuing to monitor the latest scientific findings to determine whether  
changes in safety limits are needed to protect human health.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
235  
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and  
safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor  
developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects.  
WhatlevelsofRFenergyareconsideredsafe?  
Various organizations and countries have developed standards for exposure to  
radiofrequency energy. These standards recommend safe levels of exposure for  
both the general public and for workers. In the United States, the FCC has used  
safety guidelines for RF environmental exposure since 1985.  
The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic fields are  
derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations, the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) and the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations  
were developed by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature  
related to the biological effects of RF energy.  
Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure guidelines developed by  
the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP).  
The ICNIRP safety limits are generally similar to those of the NCRP and IEEE,  
with a few exceptions. For example, ICNIRP recommends different exposure  
levels in the lower and upper frequency ranges and for localized exposure from  
certain products such as hand-held wireless telephones. Currently, the World  
Health Organization is working to provide a framework for international  
harmonization of RF safety standards.  
The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body Specific  
Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4 W/kg) as a threshold  
level of exposure at which harmful biological effects may occur. Exposure  
guidelines in terms of field strength, power density and localized SAR were then  
derived from this threshold value. In addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP  
guidelines vary depending on the frequency of the RF exposure. This is due to  
the finding that whole-body human absorption of RF energy varies with the  
frequency of the RF signal. The most restrictive limits on whole-body exposure  
are in the frequency range of 30-300 MHz where the human body absorbs RF  
energy most efficiently. For products that only expose part of the body, such as  
wireless phones, exposure limits in terms of SAR only are specified.  
The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of SAR, electric and  
magnetic field strength, and power density for transmitters operating at  
frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz. The specific values can be found in two  
FCC bulletins, OET Bulletins 56 and 65:  
WhyhastheFCCadoptedguidelinesforRFexposure?  
The FCC authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and facilities that  
generate RF and microwave radiation. It has jurisdiction over all transmitting  
services in the U.S. except those specifically operated by the Federal  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
236  
Government. While the FCC does not have the expertise to determine radiation  
exposure guidelines on its own, it does have the expertise and authority to  
recognize and adopt technically sound standards promulgated by other expert  
agencies and organizations, and has done so . (Our joint efforts with the FDA in  
developing this website is illustrative of the kind of inter-agency efforts and  
consultation we engage in regarding this health and safety issue.)  
Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), the FCC has  
certain responsibilities to consider whether its actions will significantly affect  
the quality of the human environment. Therefore, FCC approval and licensing of  
transmitters and facilities must be evaluated for significant impact on the  
environment. Human exposure to RF radiation emitted by FCC-regulated  
transmitters is one of several factors that must be considered in such  
environmental evaluations. In 1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF  
exposure as a result of a multi-year proceeding and as required by the  
Telecommunications Act of 1996.  
Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations, experimental  
radio stations and certain wireless communication facilities are required to  
undergo routine evaluation for RF compliance when they submit an application  
to the FCC for construction or modification of a transmitting facility or renewal  
of a license. Failure to comply with the FCC’s RF exposure guidelines could lead  
to the preparation of a formal Environmental Assessment, possible  
Environmental Impact Statement and eventual rejection of an application.  
Technical guidelines for evaluating compliance with the FCC RF safety  
requirements can be found in the FCC’s OET Bulletin 65.  
Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and facilities are  
normally excluded from the requirement for routine evaluation for RF exposure.  
These exclusions are based on standard calculations and measurement data  
indicating that a transmitting station or equipment operating under the  
conditions prescribed is unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the guidelines  
under normal conditions of use. Such exclusions are not exclusions from  
compliance, but, rather, exclusions from routine evaluation. The FCC’s policies  
on RF exposure and categorical exclusion can be found in Section 1.1307(b) of  
the FCC’s Rules and Regulations [(47 CFR 1.1307(b)].  
HowcanIobtaintheSpecificAbsorptionRate(SAR)valueformy  
wirelessphone?  
The FCC requires that wireless phones sold in the United States demonstrate  
compliance with human exposure limits adopted by the FCC in 1996. The  
relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a wireless telephone-user  
is given by the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), as explained above. The FCC  
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram  
(1.6 W/kg) in terms of SAR.  
Information on SAR for a specific phone model can be obtained for many  
recently manufactured phones using the FCC identification (ID) number for that  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
237  
model. The FCC ID number is usually printed somewhere on the case of the  
phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to find the  
number. Once you have the ID number, go to the following Web address:  
www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid. On this page, you will see instructions for entering the  
FCC ID number. Type the FCC ID number exactly as requested (the Grantee  
Code is the first three characters, the Equipment Product Code is the rest of the  
FCC ID number). Then click on “Start Search.” The “Grant of Equipment  
Authorization” for your telephone should appear. Read through the grant for the  
section on “SAR Compliance,” “Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules for  
RF Exposure” or similar language. This section should contain the value(s) for  
typical or maximum SAR for your phone.  
Phones and other products authorized since June 2, 2000, should have the  
maximum SAR levels noted directly on the “Grant of Equipment Authorization.”  
For phones and products authorized between about mid-1998 and June 2000,  
detailed information on SAR levels is typically found in the exhibits associated  
with the grant. Once a grant is accessed, the exhibits can be viewed by clicking  
on “View Exhibit.” Grants authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the electronic  
database but, rather, have been documented in the form of paper records.  
The FCC database does not list phones by model number. However, consumers  
may find SAR information from other sources as well. Some wireless phone  
manufacturers make SAR information available on their own Web sites. In  
addition, some non-government Web sites provide SARs for specific models of  
wireless phones. However, the FCC has not reviewed these sites and makes no  
guarantees of their accuracy. Finally, phones certified by the Cellular  
Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) are required to provide  
SAR information to consumers in the instructional materials that come with  
the phones.  
Dohands-freekitsforwirelessphonesreducerisksfromexposuretoRF  
emissions?  
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless  
phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-  
free kits can be used with wireless phones for convenience and comfort. These  
systems reduce the absorption of RF energy in the head because the phone,  
which is the source of the RF emissions, will not be placed against the head. On  
the other hand, if the phone is mounted against the waist or other part of the  
body during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy. Wireless  
phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet safety requirements regardless  
of whether they are used against the head or against the body. Either  
configuration should result in compliance with the safety limit.  
DowirelessphoneaccessoriesthatclaimtoshieldtheheadfromRF  
radiationwork?  
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from wireless  
phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories that claim to shield the  
head from those emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield the  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
238  
user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing  
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that  
these products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike “hand-free” kits,  
these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The  
phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in  
RF absorption. In February 2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged  
two companies that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phone users  
from radiation with making false and unsubstantiated claims. According to FTC,  
these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to substantiate their claim.  
Whatarewirelesstelephonebasestations?  
Fixed antennas used for wireless telecommunications are referred to as cellular  
base stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal Communications Service”) stations or  
telephone transmission towers. These base stations consist of antennas and  
electronic equipment. Because the antennas need to be high in the air, they are  
often located on towers, poles, water tanks, or rooftops. Typical heights for  
freestanding base station towers are 50-200 feet.  
Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15 feet in length, that  
are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas. These types of antennas are  
usually found in rural areas. In urban and suburban areas, wireless providers  
now more commonly use panel or sector antennas for their base stations. These  
antennas consist of rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in dimension. The  
antennas are usually arranged in three groups of three antennas each. One  
antenna in each group is used to transmit signals to wireless phones, and the  
other two antennas in each group are used to receive signals from wireless  
phones.  
At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced depends on the  
number of radio channels (transmitters) per antenna and the power of each  
transmitter. Typically, 21 channels per antenna sector are available. For a typical  
cell site using sector antennas, each of the three transmitting antennas could be  
connected to up to 21 transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters. However, it is  
unlikely that all of the transmitters would be transmitting at the same time.  
When omni-directional antennas are used, a cellular base station could  
theoretically use up to 96 transmitters, but this would be very unusual, and,  
once again, it is unlikely that all transmitters would be in operation  
simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS communications generally require  
fewer transmitters than those used for cellular radio transmissions, since PCS  
carriers usually have a higher density of base station antenna sites.  
Arewirelesstelephonebasestationssafe?  
The electromagnetic RF signals transmitted from base station antennas stations  
travel toward the horizon in relatively narrow paths. For example, the radiation  
pattern for an antenna array mounted on a tower can be likened to a thin  
pancake centered around the antenna system. The individual pattern for a single  
array of sector antennas is wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As with all forms of  
electromagnetic energy, the power decreases rapidly as one moves away from  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
239  
the antenna. Therefore, RF exposure on the ground is much less than exposure  
very close to the antenna and in the path of the transmitted radio signal. In fact,  
ground-level exposure from such antennas is typically thousands of times less  
than the exposure levels recommended as safe by expert organizations. So  
exposure to nearby residents would be well within safety margins.  
Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are required to comply with  
limits for exposure recommended by expert organizations and endorsed by  
government agencies responsible for health and safety. Measurements made  
near cellular and PCS base station antennas mounted on towers have confirmed  
that ground-level exposures are typically thousands of times less than the  
exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in order to be exposed to levels at or  
near the FCC limits for cellular or PCS frequencies an individual would  
essentially have to remain in the main transmitted radio signal (at the height of  
the antenna) and within a few feet from the antenna. This is, of course, very  
unlikely to occur.  
When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops, RF levels on that roof  
or on others near by would probably be greater than those typically  
encountered on the ground. However, exposure levels approaching or  
exceeding safety guidelines should be encountered only very close to or directly  
in front of the antennas. In addition, for sector-type antennas, typically used for  
such rooftop base stations, RF levels to the side and in back of these antennas are  
insignificant. General guidelines on antenna installations and circumstances  
that might give rise to a concern about an facility’s conformance with FCC  
regulations can be found in A Local Government Official’s Guide to  
TransmittingAntenna RF Emission Safety:Rules, Procedures, and Practical  
Guidance. This Guide can be accessed at: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety.  
Whoregulatesexposuretoradiationfrommicrowaveovens, televisionsets  
andcomputermonitors?  
The Food and Drug Administration is responsible for protecting the public from  
harmful radiation emissions from these consumer products.  
DoestheFCCroutinelymonitorradiofrequencyradiationfromantennas?  
The FCC does not have the resources or the personnel to routinely monitor the  
emissions for all the thousands of transmitters that are subject to FCC  
jurisdiction. However, the FCC does have measurement instrumentation for  
evaluating RF levels in areas that may be accessible to the public or to workers. If  
there is evidence for potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines  
for a FCC-regulated facility, staff from the FCC’s Office of Engineering and  
Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct and investigation, and,  
if appropriate, perform actual measurements. Circumstances that could give  
rise to a concern about an facility’s conformance with FCC regulations can be  
found in in A Local Government Official’s Guide toTransmittingAntenna RF  
Emission Safety:Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be  
accessed at: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety. Potential exposure problems should  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
240  
be brought to the FCC’s attention by contacting the FCC RF Safety Program at:  
202-418-2464 or by email: [email protected].  
DoestheFCCmaintainadatabasethatincludesinformationonthelocation  
andtechnicalparametersofallthetransmittingtowersitregulates?  
Each of the FCC Bureaus maintains its own licensing database system for the  
service(s) it regulates (e.g., television, cellular service, satellite earth stations.)  
The FCC issues two types of licenses: site specific and market based. In the case  
of site specific licensed facilities, technical operating information is collected  
from the licensee as part of the licensing process. However, in the case of  
market based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the licensee is granted the authority  
to operate a radio communications system in a geographic area using as many  
facilities as are required, and the licensee is not required to provide the FCC with  
specific location and operating parameters of these facilities.  
Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found the “General Menu  
The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly basis, bulk extracts of  
their licensing databases. Each licensing database has its own unique file  
structure. These extracts consist of multiple, very large files. The FCC’s Office of  
Engineering and Technology (OET) maintains an index to these databases at  
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/database/fadb.html. Entry points into the various  
databases include frequency, state/county, latitude/longitude, call-sign and  
licensee name. For further information on the Commission’s existing databases,  
you can contact Donald Campbell at [email protected] or 202-418-2405.  
Canlocalandstategovernmentalbodiesestablishlimitsfor  
RFexposure?  
Although some local and state governments have enacted rules and regulations  
about human exposure to RF energy in the past, the Telecommunications Act of  
1996 requires the Federal Government to control human exposure to RF  
emissions. In particular, Section 704 of the Act states that, “No State or local  
government or instrumentality thereof may regulate the placement,  
construction, and modification of personal wireless service facilities on the  
basis of the environmental effects of radio frequency emissions to the extent  
that such facilities comply with the Commission’s regulations concerning such  
emissions.” Further information on federal authority and FCC policy is available  
in a fact sheet from the FCC’s Wireless Telecommunications Bureau at  
Dowirelessphonesposeahealthhazard?  
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are  
associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless  
phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequency  
energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low  
levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce  
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
241  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies  
of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies  
have suggested that some biological effects may occur, but such findings have  
not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers  
have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining the reasons  
for inconsistent results.  
WhatisFDA’sroleconcerningthesafetyofwirelessphones?  
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer  
products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new  
drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if  
wireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is  
hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of  
wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or  
recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists.  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA  
has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the  
following:  
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the  
type emitted by wireless phones;  
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the  
user that is not necessary for device function; and  
Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible  
information on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health  
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have  
responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at  
the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health  
Environmental Protection Agency  
Federal Communications Commission  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration  
National Telecommunications and Information Administration  
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency working  
group activities, as well.  
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United  
States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies  
on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones.  
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon.  
While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones  
themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are  
typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
242  
phones. Base stations are thus not the primary subject of the safety questions  
discussed in this document.  
Whatkindsofphonesarethesubjectofthisupdate?  
The term “wireless phone” refers here to hand-held wireless phones with built-  
in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” phones. These types of  
wireless phones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF)  
because of the short distance between the phone and the user’s head. These RF  
exposures are limited by Federal Communications Commission safety  
guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health  
and safety agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the  
user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person’s RF exposure  
decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The so-called  
“cordless phones,” which have a base unit connected to the telephone wiring in  
a house, typically operate at far lower power levels, and thus produce RF  
exposures well within the FCC’s compliance limits.  
Whataretheresultsoftheresearchdonealready?  
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and many studies  
have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments  
investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic  
of wireless phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be  
repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested  
that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory  
animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor  
development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with  
cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to develop cancer in the  
absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22  
hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which  
people use wireless phones, so we don’t know with certainty what the results of  
such studies mean for human health.  
Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December 2000.  
Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the  
use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or  
acoustic neuroma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other  
cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health  
effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can  
answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of phone  
use in these studies was around three years.  
WhatresearchisneededtodecidewhetherRFexposurefromwireless  
phonesposesahealthrisk?  
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people  
actually using wireless phones would provide some of the data that are needed.  
Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years. However,  
very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a  
cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
243  
that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years’ follow-up  
may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer.  
This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing  
agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many years. The  
interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in  
measuring actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many  
factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held, or  
which model of phone is used.  
WhatisFDAdoingtofindoutmoreaboutthepossiblehealtheffectsof  
wirelessphoneRF?  
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of  
investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are  
conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to  
radiofrequency energy (RF).  
FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization  
International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996.  
An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda  
of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs  
around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public  
information documents on EMF issues.  
FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a  
formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do  
research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight,  
obtaining input from experts in government, industry, and academic  
organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to  
independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory  
studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a  
broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest  
research developments around the world.  
WhatstepscanItaketoreducemyexposuretoradiofrequencyenergyfrom  
mywirelessphone?  
If there is a risk from these products--and at this point we do not know that there  
is--it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even  
potential risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to  
radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a  
person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will  
reduce RF exposure.  
If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day,  
you could place more distance between your body and the source of the  
RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance. For  
example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from  
your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
244  
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful.  
But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can  
use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from  
wireless phone use.  
Whataboutchildrenusingwirelessphones?  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones,  
including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to  
radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to  
children and teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless  
phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will  
reduce RF exposure.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that  
children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the  
government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a  
recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that  
using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their  
recommendation to limit wireless phone use by children was strictly  
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard  
exists.  
Whataboutwirelessphoneinterferencewithmedicalequipment?  
Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with some  
electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method  
to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac  
pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is  
now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of  
Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical  
device manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This  
standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and  
defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI.  
FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and  
helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and  
performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that that no  
interference occurs when a person uses a “compatible” phone and a  
“compatible” hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the  
IEEE in 2000.  
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible interactions  
with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA  
will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem.  
WhichotherfederalagencieshaveresponsibilitiesrelatedtopotentialRF  
healtheffects?  
Certain agencies in the Federal Government have been involved in monitoring,  
researching or regulating issues related to human exposure to RF radiation.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
245  
These agencies include the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), the  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Occupational Safety and Health  
Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational Safety and  
Health (NIOSH), the National Telecommunications and Information  
Administration (NTIA) and the Department of Defense (DOD).  
By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968, the  
Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the FDA develops  
performance standards for the emission of radiation from electronic products  
including X-ray equipment, other medical devices, television sets, microwave  
ovens, laser products and sunlamps. The CDRH established a product  
performance standard for microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the amount of RF  
leakage from ovens. However, the CDRH has not adopted performance  
standards for other RF-emitting products. The FDA is, however, the lead federal  
health agency in monitoring the latest research developments and advising  
other agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting products used by the  
public, such as cellular and PCS phones.  
The FDA’s microwave oven standard is an emission standard (as opposed to an  
exposure standard) that allows specific levels of microwave leakage (measured  
at five centimeters from the oven surface). The standard also requires ovens to  
have two independent interlock systems that prevent the oven from generating  
microwaves the moment that the latch is released or the door of the oven is  
opened. The FDA has stated that ovens that meet its standards and are used  
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations are safe for consumer and  
industrial use. More information is available from: www.fda.gov/cdrh.  
The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal guidelines for public  
exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA activities related to RF safety and health  
are presently limited to advisory functions. For example, the EPA now chairs an  
Inter-agency Radiofrequency Working Group, which coordinates RF health-  
related activities among the various federal agencies with health or regulatory  
responsibilities in this area.  
OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to hazardous  
chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a protection guide for  
exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR 1910.97]. However, this guide was  
later ruled to be only advisory and not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an  
earlier RF exposure standard that has now been revised. At the present time,  
OSHA uses the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for enforcement purposes  
under OSHA’s “general duty clause” (for more information see:http://www.osha-  
NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. It conducts  
research and investigations into issues related to occupational exposure to  
chemical and physical agents. NIOSH has, in the past, undertaken to develop RF  
exposure guidelines for workers, but final guidelines were never adopted by the  
agency. NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies through its Physical Agents  
Effects Branch in Cincinnati,Ohio.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
246  
The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce and is responsible  
for authorizing Federal Government use of the RF electromagnetic spectrum.  
Like the FCC, the NTIA also has NEPA responsibilities and has considered  
adopting guidelines for evaluating RF exposure from U.S. Government  
transmitters such as radar and military facilities.  
The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on the biological  
effects of RF energy for a number of years. This research is now conducted  
primarily at the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory located at Brooks Air Force  
Base, Texas. The DOD Web site for RF biological effects information is listed  
with other sites in conjunction with a question on other sources of information,  
below.  
Whofundsandcarriesoutresearchonthebiologicaleffectsof  
RFenergy?  
Research into possible biological effects of RF energy is carried out in  
laboratories in the United States and around the world. In the U.S., most  
research has been funded by the Department of Defense, due to the extensive  
military use of RF equipment such as radar and high-powered radio transmitters.  
In addition, some federal agencies responsible for health and safety, such as the  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S. Food and Drug  
Administration (FDA), have sponsored and conducted research in this area. At  
the present time, most of the non-military research on biological effects of RF  
energy in the U.S. is being funded by industry organizations. More research is  
being carried out overseas, particularly in Europe.  
In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the International  
EMF Project to review the scientific literature and work towards resolution of  
health concerns over the use of RF technology. WHO maintains a Web site that  
provides extensive information on this project and about RF biological effects  
and research (www.who.ch/peh-emf).  
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public health and  
safety have worked together and in connection with WHO to monitor  
developments and identify research needs related to RF biological effects.  
HowdoesFCCAuditCellPhoneRF?  
After FCC grants permission for a particular cellular telephone to be marketed,  
FCC will occasionally conduct “post-grant” testing to determine whether  
production versions of the phone are being produced to conform with FCC  
regulatory requirements. The manufacturer of a cell phone that does not meet  
FCC’s regulatory requirements may be required to remove the cell phone from  
use and to refund the purchase price or provide a replacement phone, and may  
be subject to civil or criminal penalties. In addition, if the cell phone presents a  
risk of injury to the user, FDA may also take regulatory action. The most  
important post-grant test, from a consumer’s perspective, is testing of the RF  
emissions of the phone. FCC measures the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of the  
phone, following a very rigorous testing protocol. As is true for nearly any  
scientific measurement, there is a possibility that the test measurement may be  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
247  
less than or greater than the actual RF emitted by the phone. This difference  
between the RF test measurement and actual RF emission is because test  
measurements are limited by instrument accuracy, because test measurement  
and actual use environments are different, and other variable factors. This  
inherent variability is known as “measurement uncertainty.When FCC  
conducts post-grant testing of a cell phone, FCC takes into account any  
measurement uncertainty to when determining whether regulatory action is  
appropriate. This approach ensures that when FCC takes regulatory action, it  
will have a sound, defensible scientific basis.  
FDA scientific staff reviewed the methodology used by FCC to measure cell  
phone RF, and agreed it is an acceptable approach, given our current  
understanding of the risks presented by cellular phone RF emissions. RF  
emissions from cellular phones have not been shown to present a risk of injury  
to the user when the measured SAR is less than the safety limits set by FCC (an  
SAR of 1.6 w/kg). Even in a case where the maximum measurement uncertainty  
permitted by current measurement standards was added to the maximum  
permissible SAR, the resulting SAR value would be well below any level known  
to produce an acute effect. Consequently, FCC’s approach with measurement  
uncertainty will not result in consumers being exposed to any known risk from  
the RF emitted by cellular telephones.  
FDA will continue to monitor studies and literature reports concerning acute  
effects of cell phone RF, and concerning chronic effects of long-term exposure  
to cellular telephone RF (that is, the risks from using a cell phone for many  
years). If new information leads FDA to believe that a change to FCC’s  
measurement policy may be appropriate, FDA will contact FCC and both  
agencies will work together to develop a mutually-acceptable approach.  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
248  
Owner’s Record  
The model number, regulatory number and serial number are located on a  
nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space  
provided below. This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in  
the future.  
SM  
Model: PCS Vision Picture Phone PM-8200 by Sanyo  
Serial No.:  
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice  
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of  
the following patents:  
4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797  
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501  
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239  
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338  
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569  
5,490,165 5,511,073  
T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by U.S. Pat.  
5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending.  
User’s Guide template version 3D (09-01-03)  
Section 4A: Safety Guidelines  
249  
Section 4B  
Terms & Conditions and  
Manufacturer’s Warranty  
In This Section  
TermsandConditions  
Manufacturer’sWarranty  
YourPCSVisionPhonehasbeendesignedtoprovideyouwithreliable,  
worry-freeservice. If for any reason you have a problem with your  
equipment, please refer to the manufacturer’s warranty.  
This section contains the Terms and Conditions of Service for  
your PCS Phone and Service and the manufacturer’s warranty for  
your PCS Phone.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
250  
Terms and Conditions  
TermsandConditionsofServices  
(Effective as of November 24, 2003 until replaced)  
Thanks for choosing Sprint. These terms and conditions are part of your agreement  
with Sprint for PCS Services.  
The terms and conditions included with your PCS Phone may not be the most  
current version. For the most current version of the terms and conditions, please  
visit our website at www.sprintpcs.com or call PCS Customer Service Solutions at  
1-888-211-4PCS. If you activated PCS Services before the effective date of these  
terms and conditions, these terms and conditions replace and supersede any  
previous terms and conditions.  
If you have questions about your PCS Services, please visit our website at  
www.sprintpcs.com or call PCS Customer Service Solutions at  
1-888-211-4PCS (4727).  
Para solicitar esta literatura en español, por favor contactar a  
1-888-211-4PCS(4727).  
Agreement. Your agreement (“Agreement”) with Sprint Spectrum L.P. and any of its  
affiliates doing business as Sprint providing PCS Services (“Services”) to you is made  
up of these Terms and Conditions of Service (“Terms”) and the Service Plan that we  
agree to provide you. Your “Service Plan” is described in our marketing materials,  
and includes the terms, rates and features we set for that Service Plan. In the  
agreement, we use the words “we,” “us,” “our” or “Sprint” to refer to Sprint  
Spectrum L.P. and its affiliates doing business as Sprint. You accept the agreement  
when you activate PCS Services or make any attempt to use our PCS Services (for  
example, attempting to place any call while on or roaming off the Sprint Nationwide  
PCS Network, using data services, etc.). We may change the Agreement at any time  
by giving you prior notice. Any changes to the Agreement are effective when we  
publish them. If you use our Services or make any payment to us on or after the  
effective date of the changes, you accept the changes. If we change a material term  
of the Agreement and that change has a material adverse effect on you, you may  
terminate the Agreement without an early termination fee by calling 1-888-211-4727  
within 30 days after the invoice date of the first invoice your receive after the  
changes go into effect. You understand and agree that taxes, Universal Service fees  
and other charges imposed by the government or based on government calculations  
may increase or decrease on a monthly basis, and that this paragraph does not apply  
to any increases in such taxes, Universal Service fees and other charges.  
ProvisionofService. Your purchase of a PCS Phone or other equipment does not  
mean that we must provide Services to you. We may decide not to provide Services to  
you for any lawful reason. We may request that you provide us with any information  
we reasonably require to determine whether you qualify for Services. Services in  
some areas are managed and provided under contract with Sprint by independent  
affiliates with access to the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. Some Services may not  
be available or may operate differently in certain affiliate markets or other areas.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
251  
CreditVerification. You must have and maintain satisfactory credit to receive and  
continue to receive Services. We will verify your credit before agreeing to provide  
Services to you and we may verify your credit at any time while we provide Services  
to you. Credit verification may include a review of credit reports that we receive from  
credit bureaus. If at any time we determine, in our sole discretion, that payment for  
Services may not be made when due, we may suspend Services and require that you  
provide payment on account or a guarantee of payment before we resume Services.  
ServicePlan. You may be eligible for a fixed length PCS Service Plan (“Term Service  
Plan”) or for a month-to-month Service Plan (“Non-Term Service Plan”). We  
determine the Service Plan for which you qualify. Except as permitted by the  
Agreement, you must maintain service with us on your Term Service Plan for the  
minimum term associated with that Term Service Plan. We may offer non-identical  
Service Plans to different individuals or entities. Services and coverage under some  
Service Plans may be more limited than available under other Service Plans. Your  
Service Plan sets out the charges for Services and is your Service Plan until that  
Service Plan is changed, you switch to a different Service Plan, or your Services  
terminate. Based on your credit rating or other factors, we may require that you  
make a deposit, prepayment, or a series of deposits or prepayments, or be subject  
to an account spending limit, before Services are activated or maintained.  
ChangingServicePlans. If you are on a Non-Term Service Plan, you may change to a  
different Service Plan for which you qualify. Any change is effective at the start of  
your next full invoicing cycle unless otherwise specified by us at the time that you  
place your change order. If you change or add a different Service Plan or service  
feature and the change is effective prior to the start of your next full invoicing  
cycle, you will be invoiced a prorated amount. We may require a service charge for  
implementing any change directed by you in addition to the charges associated  
with the Service Plan or optional service features you select. If you are on a Term  
Service Plan and you want to change your service plan, you may be required to  
accept a new Term Service Plan and we may require you to pay the early  
termination fee set out in your Service Plan or other fee.  
Termination. Non-TermServicePlan. If you are on a Non-Term Service Plan, you may  
terminate Services at any time by giving us notice. Subject to the terms of this  
Agreement, we may terminate Services at any time, with or without notice. If your  
Service has been suspended due to non-payment, you may be charged a reactivation  
fee. We may deactivate any Number before you receive notice of termination  
without liability to you. Termination by either of us may be with or without cause.  
Termination. TermServicePlan. EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY THE AGREEMENT, IF  
YOU TERMINATE YOUR TERM SERVICE PLAN BEFORE THE END OF THE TERM,  
OR IF WE TERMINATE SERVICES FOR CAUSE BEFORE THE END OF THE TERM,  
YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PAY THE EARLY TERMINATION FEE ASSOCIATED  
WITH YOUR TERM SERVICE PLAN. No early termination fee is charged if you  
terminate a Term Service Plan in accordance with the return policy associated with  
your Term Service Plan. After the expiration of the term, the Terms relating to Non-  
Term Service Plans apply.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
252  
Termination. General. Regardless of whether you have a Non-Term or a Term  
Service Plan, we may terminate or suspend Services to you without liability if: (1)  
you breach any provision of this Agreement (including if you fail to pay any charges  
for Services); or (2) you fail to pay any charges due us for equipment or otherwise.  
If Services are terminated before the end of your current invoicing cycle, we will  
not prorate the monthly recurring charge to the date of termination, and you will  
not receive a credit or refund for any unused minutes in your Service Plan.  
UseofServicesandEquipment;Availability. You must be at least 18 years old to  
subscribe to our Services. We may require you to provide proof of your age and  
identity. If you are under 18 years old you may be eligible for certain Services that  
have Account Spending Limits if a person 18 years or older is also named as a  
subscriber on the Account. Your PCS Phone will not accept the services of any  
wireless provider other than Sprint (but see Roaming). Services and equipment may  
not be used for any unlawful, fraudulent or abusive purpose. By requesting Services,  
you agree that you will not use Services and equipment in any unlawful, fraudulent  
or abusive manner. You may not resell or lease Services or equipment to anyone.  
Coverage. Most services are only available within the operating range of the Sprint  
Nationwide PCS Network (also see Roaming). Coverage is not available  
everywhere. Coverage and quality of Services may be affected by conditions within  
or beyond our control, including network problems, signal strength, your  
equipment, and atmospheric, geographic, or topographic conditions. We do not  
guarantee service availability or that there will be no interruptions or delays in  
Services (e.g., dropped calls, blocked calls, etc.).  
Number. We may change the phone number (“Number”) assigned to your  
PCS device without compensation by giving you prior notice. You do not own the  
Number. You may not modify the Number we program into any phone or other  
equipment, duplicate the Number to any device other than that authorized by us  
or, except as allowed for by law, transfer (port) the Number to any other individual  
or entity. If you transfer the Number to another carrier, the terms of the Agreement  
(including the rights and obligations set forth in the Termination paragraphs) still  
apply. In certain instances, you may transfer a Number from another carrier to  
Sprint. Sprint does not in any way guarantee that such transfers to (or from) Sprint  
will be successful. If a transfer to Sprint is not successful, you will be responsible  
any discounts provided to you with the purchase of your PCS device. See our  
printed in-store materials or visit www.sprintpcs.com for additional important  
information on Number transfers.  
PhoneActivationFee. You may be required to pay a non-refundable phone  
activation fee when you activate a new Number, have us switch a Number to a  
different phone, have your current Number changed, we activate a different phone  
on your existing account or your Service Plan says so.  
Charges. For most forms of wireless Service, your usage will be charged from the time  
you first initiate contact between your phone or other wireless device and the  
network until the network connection is broken, whether or not you are successful  
in connecting with the service with which you seek to connect, even if the  
connection is later broken or dropped. An exception is that you are not charged for  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
253  
voice calls that are not completed. You are charged for completed calls to your  
Number from the time shortly before the phone starts ringing until the call is  
terminated. You will be charged peak rates for the entire duration of calls initiated  
during the peak time periods applicable to your Service. You will be charged off-peak  
rates for the entire duration of calls initiated during the off-peak time periods  
applicable to your Service. In addition to these usage charges, you may be charged for  
recurring monthly service charges, applicable local and long-distance toll charges,  
other usage charges, (including voicemail access, call waiting, call forwarding, etc.),  
connection fees, roaming charges, directory assistance, call completion charges,  
account review and management charges, optional features you select at an extra  
cost, surcharges related to government programs, and taxes. Charges for most  
Services are incurred in one-minute increments, with partial minutes of use rounded  
up to the next highest minute. You must pay, by each invoice due date, all charges for  
Services provided to the Number for each phone or other equipment that our  
records show you activated, no matter who actually uses or has possession of the  
phone or other equipment at the time Services are provided.  
PCSVision(ThirdGeneration)Charges. For PCS Vision wireless services, you will be  
charged on a per kilobyte basis for data used, rather than for airtime used. As long as  
your PCS Vision device is connected to the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network  
(“PCS Vision network”), you will be incurring data usage charges. You are  
responsible for all data activity from and directed to your PCS Phone, regardless of  
who initiates the activity. We will invoice you for all data directed to the internet  
address (or “IP address”) assigned to your device in a given PCS Vision session,  
regardless of whether your device actually receives the data. You will be charged for  
data usage initiated by others as well as those you initiate. You will be charged for  
additional data used in transporting and routing on the network. You will be charged  
for partial and interrupted data downloads or other use, including re-sent data, and  
for unsuccessful attempts to reach websites and use other applications and services,  
including those resulting from dropped network connections. If you use a Premium  
Service (including services provided by third parties but for which you are billed on  
your PCS Invoice), you will be charged for data used in transport and routing in  
addition to the charge for the Premium Service. The amount of data used and  
charged to you will vary widely, depending upon the specific PCS Vision wireless  
application or other service you use, the amount of data used in the specific  
application or service, and network congestion and other matters. For this and other  
reasons, estimates of data usage - for example, the size of downloadable files - will  
vary from what you actually use. You cannot receive incoming calls while using  
third generation services. Data usage will be rounded up to the next whole kilobyte.  
Kilobyte usage will be rounded up to the next full cent. Rounding up will occur at  
the end of each separate session or each clock hour (at the top of each hour), if the  
session spans more than 1 clock hour. When traveling on our PCS Vision network, a  
session may be ended and new session initiated, although no interruption to the  
actual data session will occur. Your invoice will not separately identify the number  
of kilobytes attributable to your use of specific sites, sessions or services used.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
254  
PCSVisionPremiumServices. Your PCS Vision wireless services may allow you to  
access or download premium content for an additional charge. Certain PCS Vision  
services (e.g., games, ringers and screen savers) primarily contain premium  
services content. Access to and downloading of premium content is not included  
with PCS Vision services. The additional charges for this premium content will be  
billed to you on your PCS Invoice. You will be charged for this content (at rates and  
charges specified at the time of access or download) that will be in addition to data  
usage charges you will incur while connected to the enhanced PCS Vision network.  
We provide no warranties and make no representations or claims with regard to  
third-party Premium Services. In certain instances, subject to the terms of the  
content purchased, we may delete premium and non-premium items downloaded  
to available storage areas (e.g., your vault), including any pictures, games and other  
content. We may limit the amount of Premium Services you may purchase in a  
specific timeframe (month, week, day, or other time period). We may suspend your  
use of Premium Services without prior consent or notice if we have reason to  
suspect fraudulent or unauthorized use of your Premium Services account, but we  
make no assurances that we will suspend your account.  
OtherTermsApplicabletoPCSVisionWirelessUsage. Use of PCS Vision wireless  
services requires the purchase of a separate third generation wireless compatible  
phone or other device and is subject to any software, memory, storage or other  
limitation in the phone or other equipment. Not all applications and services work,  
or work the same, on all third generation wireless phones and devices. Check the  
materials accompanying your phone or device to determine which applications  
and services it will support. PCS Vision wireless services are not available while off  
the PCS Vision network. PCS Vision services are not available for server devices or  
host computer applications, other systems that drive continuous heavy traffic or  
data sessions, or as substitutes for private lines or frame relay connections.  
Unlimited PCS Vision plans/options are only available with phones or PCS smart  
phones where the device is not being used as a modem in connection with other  
equipment (e.g., computers, PDAs, etc.) through use of connection kits or other  
phone-to-computer/PDA accessories, or Bluetooth or other wireless technology.  
Sprint reserves the right to deny or to terminate service without notice for any  
misuse. Sprint is not responsible for any opinions, advice, statements, services  
applications or other information provided by third parties and accessible through  
PCS Vision wireless services. Neither Sprint nor its vendors or licensors guarantees  
the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of information that is obtained through  
the PCS Vision wireless services. You are responsible for evaluating such content.  
Use of certain PCS Vision wireless services, including some messaging services,  
may result in the disclosure to others of your email address and other information  
about you in connection with your internet usage. Your accessing of, or use of,  
third party sites or services accessible PCS Vision wireless services may require the  
disclosure of information about you, subject to the policies of those sites and  
services. You consent to receiving advertising, warnings, alerts and other  
messages, including broadcast messages. Your access to PCS Vision wireless  
services is controlled by a password.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
255  
VoiceCommand. PCS Voice Command is an optional service that allows you to  
place calls by using speech recognition technology. Calls to 911 or similar  
emergency numbers cannot be placed through the Voice Command feature.  
Airtime and applicable long distance charges for a call completed from your  
Number using the Voice Command feature begin when you press or activate the  
TALK or similar key(s) and end when your call is terminated by hitting the END key  
or by returning to the Voice Command platform. If you initiate and complete  
another call without leaving the Voice Command platform, a separate charge for  
that call will begin from the time the previous call was terminated. Airtime and  
applicable long distance charges will be applied to the entire length of a completed  
call initiated from Voice Command. Using Directory Assistance to input names into  
your Voice Command address book will incur additional charges.  
Invoicing. Invoicing cycles are approximately 30 days in length. Invoicing cycles  
and dates may change from time to time. Except as otherwise provided in your  
Service Plan, monthly recurring charges (MRCs) are invoiced one invoicing cycle in  
advance. Charges for Services are usually invoiced as soon as possible after the  
charges accrue. We may, however, invoice you for usage and charges occurring  
before the invoicing cycle being invoiced, if they were not previously invoiced. If  
you are invoiced for usage incurred during a prior invoicing cycle, those minutes  
will be applied to your Service Plan minutes for the current invoicing cycle.  
However, if you change your PCS Service Plan between the time the usage was  
incurred and the beginning of the current invoicing cycle, those minutes from the  
prior invoicing cycle will be charged at the rate per minute for usage over included  
minutes provided in the Service Plan in effect at the time the usage was incurred.  
Payment. If you have authorized payment for Services or equipment by credit card  
or by debiting a bank account, no additional notice or consent is required before we  
invoice the credit card or debit the bank account for all amounts due to us or billed  
by us on behalf of a third party. You must promptly notify us of any change in your  
invoicing address or of the credit card or bank account used for payment. We  
reserve the right to require payment by money order, cashier’s check or other  
secured form of payment. If we take action to receive payment beyond invoicing  
you for charges for Services or equipment, you must pay our costs and expenses of  
collection, including attorneys’ fees and expenses, the fees of any collection agency  
and court costs. If we act as an invoicing agent for a third-party service provider,  
payments received are first applied to amounts due and owing to us and any  
remaining amounts are applied to sums due and owing to the third-party service  
provider. We may immediately charge an additional fee for any check or other  
negotiable instrument endorsed by you and returned unpaid by a financial  
institution for any reason. You may be charged fees for certain methods of payment.  
LatePaymentCharges. Payment is past due if we do not receive it by the due date  
shown on your invoice. Any payment for Services and equipment not made when  
due accrues late charges until paid at the rate of 5% per month or at the highest rate  
allowed by law. Acceptance of late or partial payments (even if marked “paid in full”)  
does not waive our right to collect all amounts that you owe us. If your Service has  
been suspended due to non-payment, you may be charged a reactivation fee.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
256  
DisputedCharges. You must raise any dispute that you have about any charges  
invoiced to you within 15 days of the date of the invoice or you have accepted the  
invoice. You may notify us of any dispute by notifying PCS Customer Service  
Solutions. Calls to our sales or general business offices are not notice of a dispute. If  
disputed invoice procedures are described on the invoice, you must follow them.  
AccountSpendingLimit. If we agree to provide Services to you on an Account  
Spending Limit basis, we will tell you your Account Spending Limit before we start  
Services to your Number, or as reasonably practicable after the limit is imposed. If  
we require a deposit for you to establish or keep Services on an Account Spending  
Limit basis, we will hold the deposit as partial guarantee of payment for Services (see  
Deposits). Charges for Services accrue against your Account Spending Limit as they  
are incurred. We may charge an initial ASL start up fee. We may charge a monthly ASL  
service fee, in addition to your recurring monthly service charge. We may suspend  
Services to your Number without prior notice to you when your account balance  
reaches your Account Spending Limit. Services are restored when you have paid any  
past due balance and pay a specified minimum amount to reduce your account  
balance below your Account Spending Limit. We may change this minimum amount  
at any time upon notice to you. You may pay any past due balance and the minimum  
amount by any method authorized by Sprint. Contact PCS Customer Service  
Solutions for information about authorized methods of making these payments. We  
may charge you a fee for calls that involve our live customer care services. If we  
provide Services to you on an Account Spending Limit basis, Services and coverage  
may be limited in certain ways. You must pay all charges for Services even if they  
exceed the amount of your Account Spending Limit.  
ClearPay. If we agree to provide Services to you as a Clear Pay customer, we may  
suspend Services to your Number without prior notice to you immediately when  
your bill becomes past due. Even if your bill is not past due, we may suspend  
services if your unpaid usage exceeds $125 or another amount to be determined by  
your past credit or usage history. If we require a deposit for you to establish or keep  
Services as a Clear Pay customer, we will hold the deposit as partial guarantee of  
payment for Services (see Deposits, below). Contact PCS Customer Service  
Solutions for information about authorized methods of making these payments. We  
may charge you a fee for calls that involve our live customer care services. If we  
provide Services to you on as a Clear Pay basis, Services and coverage may be  
limited in certain ways. You must pay all charges for Services whether or not your  
Services are suspended or terminated.  
Deposits. If we require a deposit for you to establish or keep Services, we will hold  
the deposit as partial guarantee of payment for Services. We may change the  
deposit amount at any time to reflect revised estimated monthly charges based  
upon your usage. A deposit may not be used to pay any invoice (unless it is used to  
pay a final invoice) or delay payment. The deposit amount, the length of time we  
hold the deposit and changes to the deposit amount are determined based on your  
credit and payment history. The rate of interest, if any, on the deposit is subject to  
change. We may mix deposits with our other funds. If Services are terminated for  
any reason, we may, without notice to you, apply your deposit toward payment of  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
257  
outstanding charges and return any excess to you at your last known address within  
75 days after termination of Services. If the U.S. Postal Service cannot deliver the  
money to you and returns it to us, we will hold it for you for one year from the date  
of return and, during that period, we may charge a servicing fee against the deposit  
balance. Any money held during this one-year period will not accrue interest for  
your benefit. You forfeit any portion of the money left after the one-year period.  
WirelessWebandVoicePortalServices. Wireless Web Services are part of the  
Services that can be obtained through Sprint. Wireless Web Services are not  
available in all markets or while roaming off the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.  
Use of Wireless Web Services requires an Internet-ready PCS Phone or certain other  
equipment (or both) and is subject to any memory, storage or other limitation in the  
phone or other equipment. Wireless Web Services are not available on PCS Vision  
phones or devices. The Caller ID blocking feature is not available when using  
Wireless Web Services. Any use of Wireless Web Services deducts from your Service  
Plan minutes. For data calls (including Wireless Web and Voice Portal calls) that are  
attempted, but not completed, you are charged for the time during which the  
network attempts to connect the call. You are charged for time spent connected to  
the Wireless Web or Voice Portal, including time spent browsing on the Internet or  
Voice Portal and reviewing or scrolling through Internet information on-line while  
still connected to the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. Not all Internet sites can be  
accessed and you may receive an error message if you attempt to access a site that  
cannot be accessed through Wireless Web Services. You are also charged for  
Wireless Web connections to review your PCS account information. Wireless Web  
Services are not available with all Service Plans. Sprint is not responsible for any  
opinions, advice, statements, services or other information provided by third-  
parties and accessible through Wireless Web Services or Voice Portal Services.  
Neither Sprint nor its vendors or licensors guarantees the accuracy, completeness or  
usefulness of information that is obtained through the Wireless Web Services or  
Voice Portal Services. You are responsible for evaluating such content.  
TaxesandSurcharges. We invoice you for taxes, fees and other charges levied by or  
remitted directly to federal, state or local authorities, or foreign government on  
Services including, without limitation, sales, gross receipts, use, and excise taxes. If  
you claim any tax exemption, you must provide us with a valid tax-exempt  
document. Any tax exemption applies only from the date we receive a valid tax-  
exempt document. We also invoice you for fees that we collect and remit to the  
government such as Universal Service, and for surcharges that we collect and keep  
to pay for the costs of complying with government mandates such as number  
pooling and portability, and Enhanced 911 service. These charges are neither taxes  
nor government imposed assessments.  
Roaming. Calls made while off the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network are “roaming”  
calls. Your PCS Phone is specifically designed and engineered to work only on the  
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. It works on another CDMA PCS provider’s system  
only when a roaming agreement is in place between Sprint and the other providers.  
If your PCS Phone is a dual-mode phone, it works on both a CDMA PCS provider’s  
system (in addition to the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network) and a wireless analog  
telecommunications provider’s system only when roaming agreements are in place  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
258  
between Sprint and the other providers. If we do not have a roaming agreement in  
place, you may be able to place roaming calls “manually” by using a valid credit card.  
If there is a gap or other interruption of coverage within a PCS coverage area that  
prevents connection with the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network and your dual-band  
phone is set to roam automatically when outside PCS coverage, you may incur  
roaming fees within a PCS coverage area. Certain features and services may not be  
available when roaming (including PCS Vision, voicemail, call waiting, call  
forwarding, etc.).  
PhonesandOtherEquipment. Phones and other equipment may be purchased and  
returned as provided in the purchase documents. We are not the manufacturer of  
the phones or other equipment. The only warranties on the phones or other  
equipment are any limited warranties extended by the manufacturers. We have no  
liability in connection with the phones and other equipment or for the  
manufacturers’ acts or omissions.  
LostorStolenEquipment. If your phone or other equipment is lost or stolen, you  
must notify us by calling PCS Customer Service Solutions. You are responsible for  
all charges for Services provided to the Number for the lost or stolen equipment  
before you notify us of the loss or theft. We will deactivate Services to the Number  
upon notification to us of any loss or theft. You may be required to provide  
evidence of the loss or theft (for example, a police report or sworn statement). If  
the equipment is later found, we may require that you exchange it for another  
phone or other equipment before we reactivate Services (if we do reactivate  
Services), as well as require you to pay a reactivation fee. We will deactivate  
Services to any Number without prior notice to you if we suspect any unlawful or  
fraudulent use of the Number. You agree to cooperate reasonably with us in  
investigating suspected unlawful or fraudulent use.  
Messages. You will incur airtime usage charges when accessing your voicemail  
from your PCS Phone. You may also incur charges in accessing text messages from  
your PCS Phone. You may access your voicemail without incurring airtime usage  
charges by checking your voicemail from a wireline phone. We may impose limits  
on the number of voicemail or text message that can be retained through your  
PCS account. Audible or visual indicators of text or voicemail messages, including  
mailbox icons on your PCS Phone, may not always provide an up to date indication  
of new messages. In certain instances, you may be required to manually reset or  
clear your mailbox indicator.  
CallerID. If you do not want people you call to receive the Number assigned to your  
phone, you must call PCS Customer Service Solutions for information about  
automatic Caller ID blocking. The Number assigned to your phone can be blocked  
on a per-call basis by dialing *67 + Destination Number + TALK (or similar key), but  
Caller ID delivery resumes on the next call you make. Caller ID display on incoming  
calls to your Number depends on receiving the information from the calling party.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
259  
TTYAccess. A TTY (also known as TDD or Text Telephone) is a telecommunications  
device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or  
language disabilities, to communicate by telephone. TTY doesn’t work with all  
PCS Phones. If you have a PCS TTY-capable phone, it may not function effectively, or  
at all, when attempting 911 calls due to the equipment or software of the answering  
agency. Therefore, a TTY device should not be relied on for 911 calls.  
Pay-Per-CallService. We will not complete calls from your Number to 900, 976 and  
similar numbers for pay-per-call services.  
InternationalCalling. You may be limited in the international destinations that you  
can call with Services. You should contact PCS Customer Service Solutions for  
information about international destinations that you cannot call.  
LimitationofLiability. Except as otherwise provided in this section, our sole liability  
to you for any loss or damage arising out of providing or failing to provide Services  
(including mistakes, omissions, interruptions, delays, errors, or defects) does not  
exceed (1) in cases related to a specific piece of equipment, the prorated MRC for  
Services to the piece of equipment during the affected period, or (2) in cases not  
related to a specific piece of equipment, the prorated MRCs for Services to you  
during the affected period. Neither we nor our vendors, suppliers or licensors are  
liable for any damage arising out of or in connection with:  
a) any act or omission of any telecommunications service or other service  
provider other than us;  
b) any directory listing;  
c) any dropped calls or inability to place or receive calls;  
d) any interruption of Services, including interruptions caused by equipment or  
facilities failure or shortages, transmission limitations or system capacity  
limitations;  
e) traffic or other accidents, or any health-related claims allegedly arising from the  
use of Services, phones, equipment or accessories used in connection with the  
Services;  
f) the use of Wireless Web Services and PCS Vision applications and services,  
including the accuracy or reliability of any information obtained from the Internet  
using Wireless Web Services or from Voice Portal Services, PCS Vision wireless  
services or Internet services, content or applications not supported by Sprint PCS;  
g) any late or failed message delivery;  
h) any interruption or failure of 911 or E911 emergency services or identification  
of the Number, address or name associated with any person accessing or  
attempting to access emergency services from your phone;  
i) the installation or repair of any products or equipment by parties who are not  
our authorized employees or agents;  
j) events due to factors beyond our control, including acts of God (including,  
without limitation, weather-related phenomena, fire or earthquake), war, riot,  
strike, or orders of governmental authority;  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
260  
k) any act or omission of any third party or independent contractor that offers  
products or services in conjunction with or through the Services; or  
l) your negligent or intentional act or omission.  
NOCONSEQUENTIALOROTHERDAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE WE  
LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL  
DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN  
CONNECTION WITH PROVIDING OR FAILING TO PROVIDE SERVICES, PHONES  
OR OTHER EQUIPMENT USED IN CONNECTION WITH THE SERVICES,  
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR  
COST OF REPLACEMENT PRODUCTS AND SERVICES. THIS SECTION SURVIVES  
TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.  
Indemnification. You indemnify and defend us, our partners, directors, officers,  
employees and agents from and against any claim, action, damage, liability and  
expense arising out of or in connection with: (1) your acts or omissions that occur  
in connection with your use of the Services or equipment used in connection with  
the Services, and (2) any communications you make or receive using the Services.  
This indemnification extends to and includes any attorney’s fees and costs incurred  
by us arising from any actions or claims to which this indemnification applies, or  
from the contesting of the applicability of this provision. This section survives  
termination of this Agreement.  
MANDATORYARBITRATIONOFDISPUTES. ANY CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR  
DISPUTE OF ANY KIND BETWEEN THE CUSTOMER AND THE COMPANY AND/OR  
ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES, AGENTS, AFFILIATES OR OTHER REPRESENTATIVES,  
WHETHER SOUNDING IN CONTRACT, STATUTE, OR TORT, INCLUDING FRAUD,  
MISREPRESENTATION, FRAUDULENT INDUCEMENT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR  
EQUITABLE THEORY AND REGARDLESS OF THE DATE OF ACCRUAL OF SUCH  
CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE SHALL BE RESOLVED BY FINAL AND  
BINDING ARBITRATION AS PRESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION. THE FEDERAL  
ARBITRATION ACT, NOT STATE LAW, GOVERNS THE QUESTION OF WHETHER A  
CLAIM IS SUBJECT TO ARBITRATION. HOWEVER, NOTHING CONTAINED IN  
THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION SHALL PRECLUDE THE CUSTOMER FROM  
RESOLVING ANY CLAIM, CONTROVERSY OR DISPUTE IN SMALL CLAIMS COURT  
HE OR SHE OTHERWISE WOULD HAVE THE RIGHT TO PURSUE.  
A single arbitrator engaged in the practice of law will conduct the arbitration. The  
arbitrator will be selected according to the rules of CPR or, alternatively, may be  
selected by agreement of the parties, who shall cooperate in good faith to select the  
arbitrator. The arbitration will be conducted by, and under the then-applicable  
rules of the CPR Institute for Dispute Resolution. All expedited procedures  
prescribed by the applicable rules will apply. Any required hearing fees and costs  
shall be paid by the parties as required by the applicable rules or as required by  
applicable law, but the arbitrator shall have the power to apportion such costs as  
the arbitrator deems appropriate.The arbitrator’s decision and award will be final  
and binding (subject to the appeal clause below), and judgment on the award  
rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in any court with jurisdiction.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
261  
An appeal may be taken under the CPR Arbitration Appeal Procedure from any final  
award of any arbitral panel in any arbitration arising out of or related to this  
agreement that is conducted in accordance with the requirements of such Appeal  
Procedure. Unless otherwise agreed by the parties and the appeal tribunal, the  
appeal shall be conducted at the place of the original arbitration.  
If any party files a judicial or administrative action asserting a claim that is subject to  
arbitration and another party successfully stays such action or compels arbitration,  
the party filing that action must pay the other party’s costs and expenses incurred  
in seeking such stay or compelling arbitration, including attorney’s fees.  
Notices. You may get our current address for written notice by calling PCS Customer  
Service Solutions. Written notice to you is sent to your last known address in our  
invoicing records. Written notice is effective three days after deposit in the U.S.  
mail, postage prepaid, and properly addressed. Unless required by this Agreement  
or Applicable Laws, (1) you may notify us by calling PCS Customer Service Solutions,  
and (2) we may notify you by leaving a message for you on your PCS Phone,  
answering machine or with your answering service. Notice addresses may be  
changed by giving notice as provided in this section.  
ChoiceofLaw;Jurisdiction. This Agreement is governed by and must be construed  
under federal law and the laws of the State of Kansas, without regard to choice of  
law principles.  
General. If either of us does not enforce any right or remedy available under this  
Agreement, that failure is not a waiver of the right or remedy for any other breach or  
failure by the other party. Our waiver of any requirement in any one instance is not a  
general waiver of that requirement and does not amend this Agreement. This  
Agreement is subject to any applicable federal and state law (collectively,  
“Applicable Laws”). If any part of this Agreement is held invalid or unenforceable,  
that part is interpreted consistent with Applicable Laws as nearly as possible to  
reflect the original intentions of the parties and the rest of this Agreement remains in  
full force and effect. Section headings are for descriptive purposes only and are not  
used to interpret this Agreement. You may not assign this Agreement to any other  
person or entity without our prior written approval. This Agreement (including any  
referenced documents and attachments) makes up the entire agreement between  
you and us and replaces all prior written or spoken agreements, representations,  
promises or understandings between you and us. The provisions of this Agreement  
that are contemplated to be enforceable after the termination of this Agreement  
survive termination of this Agreement. If there is a conflict, the Service Plan  
(including any Term Service Plan) controls over the Terms.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
262  
TermsofPictureMailService  
The Picture Mail service (“Service”) – including access to and use of the services at  
www.picturemail.sprintpcs.com – is provided to you by Sprint under the following  
terms and conditions and incorporate the Terms and Conditions set forth at  
www.sprintpcs.com which include the Terms and Conditions of Service provided  
with your PCS Phone User’s Guide, terms regarding copyright and trademark  
matters, and other terms relating to the use of our services. Your use of the Service  
indicates your acceptance of all of these terms (collectively “Terms”). Sprint may  
change these Terms from time to time at our discretion with or without notice to  
you. Any changes will be posted on the Service.  
1. Eligibility  
The Service is provided to individuals who are at least 18 years old and to minors  
who have parental permission. We encourage parents and guardians to take an  
active role in protecting the privacy and security of their children. If you as a parent  
have any concerns regarding this issue, please feel free to contact us at  
2. MembershipFees  
Picture Mail is available at an additional monthly charge (in addition to any charges  
you may pay for PCS Vision services) through Sprint and provides you basic  
services, such as the ability to store and share pictures taken on select PCS Vision  
Picture Phones or devices. Additional features or services (beyond basic services)  
may also be available from time to time for an additional charge. If you have  
previously not signed up for the Service with activation of your PCS Service Plan,  
you may add this Service to your account for an additional monthly charge through  
a PCS Vision Picture Phone.  
3. PictureMailPassword  
We will have access to your Picture Mail Password and User Name. We may remind  
you of your password, at your request, by sending an email to the address you used  
when creating your account. We will not disclose your Picture Mail Password to  
third parties, but we may access your account if necessary to maintain the Service,  
to comply with lawful requests from governmental authorities, or in response to  
court orders, subpoenas, complaints.  
4. PhotoLoss  
Sprint does not warrant that pictures or albums stored will not be deleted,  
modified or damaged. If pictures or images are particularly valuable, have  
sentimental or other intangible value or are otherwise unique or irreplaceable,  
reliable storage alternatives should be used, including hard copy duplication and  
electronic back up and storage.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
263  
5. UseofRelatedSoftware  
Any software that is provided for download and installation on your personal  
computer or electronic device in connection with the Service is licensed under the  
terms and conditions of a separate software license agreement. These license  
agreements are available for your review upon download, installation and/or use of  
that software.  
6. UseofPictureMail  
Solely for the purposes of displaying your pictures to selected persons and fulfilling  
your print orders, you grant us permission to use, download, upload, copy, print,  
display, reproduce, modify, publish, post, transmit and distribute any material  
included in your albums.  
7. MemberConduct  
(a) In consideration for use of the Service, you agree to provide true, accurate,  
current and complete information about you as prompted during the registration  
process, and to maintain and update this information to keep it true, accurate,  
current and complete.  
(b) You are responsible for maintaining the confidentiality of your Picture Mail  
Password and Account, and you agree to be fully responsible for all activities which  
occur through anyone’s use of your Picture Mail Password or account, whether or  
not authorized by you. You agree to notify Sprint immediately of any unauthorized  
use of your password or account or any other breach of security.  
(c) You must provide at your own expense all equipment and software required to  
use the Service, including computer and photography equipment, application  
software, modems, and access to the Internet. We are not responsible for delays  
resulting from incompatibility of such equipment and software, or from improper  
configuration or maintenance of such equipment and software.  
(d) While we do not control the content of any member submissions to the Service  
and do not have any obligation to monitor such content, if we have any reason to  
believe that any language, content, graphics or other materials contained within  
your content is inappropriate, we may, in our sole discretion, refuse to process any  
print orders, remove your pictures from our servers, suspend your account, restrict  
access to it, remove content from it, or terminate it.  
(e) You agree (1) not to use the Service for illegal purposes; (2) not to interfere with  
or disrupt the Service or servers or networks or software or data connected to the  
Service; (3) to comply with all requirements, procedures, policies and regulations of  
networks connected to the Service; and (4) to comply with all applicable laws  
regarding the transmission of technical data exported from the United States. You  
agree to abide by all applicable local, state, national, and international laws and  
regulations in your use of the Service and in your use of any software downloaded  
from the Service, including, without limitation, copyright, trademark, obscenity and  
defamation laws.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
264  
(f) You agree not to interfere with the use and enjoyment of the Service by other  
users of the Service. You agree not to attempt to gain unauthorized access to other  
computer systems or networks connected to the Service.  
(g) You agree not to transmit through the Service, or upload to it (1) any pictures or  
other content in violation of the copyrights, privacy rights or other rights of any  
other person; (2) any unlawful, harassing, libelous, privacy invading, abusive,  
hateful, threatening, harmful, vulgar, defamatory, obscene or otherwise  
objectionable material of any kind; (3) any material that violates the rights of  
another, including, but not limited to, the intellectual property rights of another;  
(4) any material that harms minors; (5) any material that violates any applicable  
local, state, national, or international law or regulation; or (6) “junk mail,” “spam,”  
“chain letters,” or unsolicited mass distribution of email.  
8. PrivacyStatement  
In order to register you as a member of the Service, we ask you to supply us with  
some basic information (email address, user selected Picture Mail Password, name)  
during the registration process and, occasionally, at other times while using the  
Service. All uses of your information will be in accordance with our privacy policy,  
as set forth in the following Privacy Policy. As this policy may be updated from time  
to time, a current version can be found at www.sprintpcs.com.  
PRIVACYPOLICY  
(a) Sprint respects the privacy of its customers, and other individuals and  
businesses using the Websites owned and operated by Sprint and its Affiliates  
(“Sprint Websites”). This updated Privacy Policy effective October 22, 2001, is to  
keep you informed about the types of information collected on Sprint Websites and  
how the information is used and protected. The revised Privacy Policy includes  
information about advertisements on Sprint Websites and access to your account  
information.  
Sprint protects the privacy of its local, long distance and wireless customers  
consistent with the Federal Telecommunications Act and rules and regulations  
issued by the Federal Communications Commission.  
Sprint’s Privacy Policy for its high speed Internet services can be accessed at:  
There are two types of information that may be exchanged between the Sprint site  
and the user during each visit to a Sprint site. They are:  
1. General technical data transmitted between your computer and the Sprint site  
that does not identify you personally.  
2. Personally identifiable information that you voluntarily share. The types of  
personally identifiable information that you might share include your name,  
address, phone number, email address and credit card number.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
265  
(b)AnonymousInformation  
In order to provide you with the information and services that you look for from the  
Sprint Websites, Sprint gathers certain types of information from you that are not  
personally identifiable. This is called anonymous information and includes:  
1. The type of Internet browser you use when you visit  
2. The types of computer operating system you use  
3. The search engine you use to access the Sprint Websites (such as “AOL.com,”  
4. The specific Sprint Website that you visit (sprint.com, sprintpcs.com, etc.).  
The anonymous information collected is not associated with you personally or  
your business. Sprint uses this anonymous information in the aggregate to improve  
Sprint Websites and the services we provide through those sites.  
(c)UseOfCookies  
Sprint Websites may use “cookies” to collect the anonymous information described  
in this Privacy Policy. Cookies are bits of encrypted data that are loaded by a Sprint  
server onto your computer or other device when you visit a Sprint Website. The  
server can retrieve the cookies the next time you visit a site and use them to identify  
the computer as a return visitor. Sprint uses cookies to collect non-personally  
identifiable information and generically track usage patterns on the Sprint Websites  
in order to monitor activity and administer the sites. Sprint also uses information  
obtained from cookies to improve Sprint Websites, and make decisions concerning  
advertising, product offerings and services. Most users can disable cookies from  
their Internet browsers, receive a warning before a cookie is placed on their  
computer, and erase all cookies from their computer hard drives by following the  
instructions provided by the browser.  
(d)AdvertisementsOnSprintWebsites  
Advertising companies deliver ads on some Sprint Websites. You should be aware  
that when you click on these ads, the advertising companies may also deploy  
cookies to receive anonymous information about ad viewing by Internet users on  
Sprint Websites and other Websites. This information is associated with your Web  
browser, but cannot be associated with your name or email address without your  
permission. Therefore, advertising companies may know where your computer  
goes on the Web, but they do not know who you are unless you tell them. Sprint  
does not provide personally identifiable information about its customers or Sprint  
Website visitors to these advertising companies.  
(e)PersonallyIdentifiableInformation  
Sprint may ask you to provide what is often referred to as “personally identifiable  
information” such as your name, address, telephone number and email address  
when you use Sprint Websites to: purchase a service or product online, enter a  
contest or sweepstakes, ask to receive information, respond to a survey, register  
with a Sprint Website, access your account, ask for a personalized service, request  
customer service online, or apply for a job. You always have the alternative of  
mailing or calling Sprint with the information requested if you do not wish to  
provide it online. Personally identifiable information provided at a Sprint Website  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
266  
to order Sprint services other than Internet services will be protected in the same  
manner as when the information is provided by other means such as over the  
telephone or by mail. We protect customer information obtained from the local,  
long distance and wireless service customers of Sprint consistent with federal laws  
governing telecommunications services and with regulations issued by the Federal  
Communications Commission. Sprint’s Privacy Policy for its Internet services can  
We use personally identifiable information provided at a Sprint Website in the  
following ways unless otherwise specified:  
1. For its intended purpose (such as to complete an online order for service).  
2. To provide you with information about new PCS Products and Services or  
products and services offered in conjunction with Sprint business partners.  
(f)DisclosureToThirdParties  
Sprint will not sell or disclose to outside parties any personally identifiable  
information obtained from a Sprint online service or the registration at a Sprint  
Website without your consent except under the following circumstances:  
1. When required by law,  
2. When disclosure is necessary to protect the safety of a customer, third party or  
Sprint’s property,  
3. If it is required in connection with any sale or transfer of all or a portion of  
Sprint’s assets.  
When Sprint uses agents, contractors or other companies to perform services on  
its behalf, Sprint will require that they protect your personally identifiable  
information consistent with this Privacy Policy. Sprint may share the anonymous  
information described in this Privacy Policy with third parties from time-to-time.  
(g)EmailCommunications  
Email is an increasingly popular communication tool through which you and your  
business may communicate with Sprint. Likewise, Sprint may use email to  
communicate with you, respond to your email, and to tell you about new products  
and services. If you do not wish to receive email promotions and new products and  
service announcements from Sprint, please follow the instructions that appear at  
the end of the email communication that you receive from Sprint to have your  
name removed from the list.  
(h)Security  
Sprint utilizes several encryption methods to ensure that the data you submit on  
any of the Sprint Websites is secure. Through this “secure session,” information  
that you input into a Sprint online order form will be sent and will arrive privately  
and unaltered at a Sprint server. This security prohibits access to your information  
by other companies and Web users.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
267  
(i)Children  
Sprint does not intend to collect personally identifiable information from  
individuals under 18 years of age. If Sprint becomes aware that a user who is under  
18 is using a Sprint Website, Sprint will specifically instruct that individual that they  
are not to submit information on Sprint Websites without a parent or guardian’s  
consent. If a child has provided Sprint with personally identifiable information  
without the knowledge of Sprint, a parent or guardian of the child may contact  
Sprint at [email protected] and Sprint will delete the child’s information from  
our existing files.  
(j)Links  
Some Sprint Websites contain links to other Websites that are owned and operated  
by parties other than Sprint. Please be aware that this Privacy Policy does not  
extend to any Websites other than those owned and controlled by Sprint.  
(k)AccountInformation  
You may always contact us at [email protected] or by telephone or mail to  
verify your name, address, email address, telephone number and/or billing  
information. Sprint will correct any information that is inaccurate.  
(l)Questions  
If you have questions or comments regarding this Privacy Policy, you may contact  
us at [email protected]. If you have submitted personally identifiable  
information, and would like that information deleted from our records, please  
contact us at our email address, [email protected]. We will use reasonable  
efforts to delete that information from our files.  
(m)Updates  
Sprint may amend this Privacy Policy from time-to- time. These changes will be  
posted online.  
9. UsageandStorage  
We and our suppliers assume no responsibility for: (1) any full or partial loss,  
deletion or failure to store your pictures or any other data; (2) any notice or lack of  
notice of such loss, deletion or failure to store your data; or (3) any correct or  
erroneous informing of or failure to inform user of such loss, deletion or failure to  
store your data. From time to time we may establish an upper limit on the size of  
data storage that you are permitted to use on the Service and/or an upper limit on  
the frequency or amount of usage that you are permitted on the Service or related  
software. We may establish a reasonable period of time (for example, three  
months) such that if you do not use the Service at least once during such period, we  
may terminate the Service to you for non-use, and delete pictures and other data  
that you may have stored through the Service.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
268  
10. NoResaleofServiceorSoftware  
Your membership account is intended only for personal, noncommercial use. You  
agree not to reproduce, duplicate, copy, sell, resell or exploit for any commercial  
purposes, any portion of the Service, use of the Service, access to the Service, or  
related software.  
11. ProprietaryRights  
You agree that content, including but not limited to software, text, pictures,  
graphics, video, music, sound, or other materials or information, contained in the  
Service or contained in sponsor advertisements or presented to you through the  
Service or advertisers is protected by copyrights, trademarks, service marks,  
patents, or other proprietary rights, laws, and/or treaties. You agree that you are  
permitted to use such materials and information only as expressly authorized by us  
or the true owner of the right in question and you may not copy, reproduce,  
transmit, distribute, or create derivative works of such materials or information  
without proper express, written authorization from us or the true owner of the  
right in question.  
12. ChangestotheServiceandTerminationoftheService  
(a) We may change these Terms from time to time without notice to you. Should  
you object to any of these Terms or any changes to them, or should you become  
dissatisfied with the Service in any way, your only recourse is to immediately: (1)  
discontinue use of the Service; and (2) terminate the Service and notify us of the  
termination. Termination of the Service may, in some instances, require you to  
change your PCS Service Plan.  
(b) We may discontinue the Service or any feature or portion of the Service at any  
time, with or without notice. You agree that upon modification or discontinuance  
of the Service, we may delete the data you have stored on the Service.  
(c) You agree that we may terminate your membership in the Service and delete any  
and all information, posting, communications, albums and pictures at any time,  
without notice, if we believe: (1) that you have failed to use the Service at least  
once during a reasonable span of time as determined by us; (2) that you have  
violated or acted inconsistently with the letter or spirit of these Terms; (3) that you  
have violated our rights or the rights of other users or parties; or (4) that you have  
abused or misused the Service in any way, including but not limited to exceeding  
any limits that we may place on the amount of data that any individual may store on  
the Service.  
(d) We reserve the right at all times to disclose any information posted by you or any  
other user as necessary to satisfy any law, regulation or governmental request, or to  
edit, remove, or refuse to post any information or materials, in whole or in part,  
that in our sole discretion are objectionable or in violation of these terms and  
conditions.  
(e) Except as otherwise set forth in this provision, in the event your Service is  
terminated we will make reasonable efforts to provide 30 days prior notice before  
may delete any data from the Service.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
269  
13. Disclaimers  
(a) We hereby disclaim any and all responsibility or liability for the accuracy,  
content, completeness, legality, reliability, operability or availability of information  
or material in this Service. We further disclaim any responsibility for the deletion,  
misdelivery, failure to store or untimely delivery of any information or material. We  
disclaim any responsibility for any harm resulting from downloading or accessing  
any information or material through the Service. You agree that you, the member,  
will bear all risk associated with any content that you access.  
(b) All processing of film, prints, slides, negatives or digital images is subject to our  
Terms. You agree that your sole remedy for any damage or loss of any materials that  
you submit to us for processing, printing, storage, transmission or other handling,  
even if caused by negligence or other fault, will only entitle you to replacement  
with a like amount of unexposed film and processing. EXCEPT FOR THE  
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF REPLACEMENT, THE HANDLING OF ANY FILM, PRINT,  
SLIDE, NEGATIVE OR DIGITAL IMAGE IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OR LIABILITY  
AND RECOVERY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IS  
EXCLUDED.  
(c) THIS SITE AND ALL PRODUCTS, SERVICES AND CONTENT PROVIDED  
THROUGH IT ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” AND WITH NO  
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
APPLICABLE LAW, WE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND,  
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. WE DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES FOR THE  
SECURITY, RELIABILITY, TIMELINESS, AND PERFORMANCE OF THIS SERVICE,  
OR THAT THIS SITE OR OUR SERVER IS FREE OF VIRUSES OR OTHER HARMFUL  
COMPONENTS. WE DISCLAIM, TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW,  
ANY WARRANTIES FOR OTHER SERVICES OR GOODS RECEIVED THROUGH OR  
ADVERTISED ON THIS SERVICE OR RECEIVED THROUGH ANY LINKS PROVIDED  
IN THE SERVICE, AS WELL AS FOR ANY INFORMATION OR ADVICE RECEIVED  
THROUGH THE SERVICE OR THROUGH ANY LINKS PROVIDED IN THE SERVICE.  
(d) YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE THAT, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL SPRINT BE LIABLE TO  
ANY USER ON ACCOUNT OF THAT USER’S USE OR MISUSE OF AND RELIANCE  
ON THE SITE OR ITS ASSOCIATED PRODUCTS AND SERVICES. SUCH  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO PREVENT RECOVERY OF DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, AND  
PUNITIVE DAMAGES (EVEN IF WE HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGES). SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY WHETHER  
THE DAMAGES ARISE FROM USE OR MISUSE OF AND RELIANCE ON THE SITE,  
PRODUCTS OR SERVICES, FROM INABILITY TO USE THE SITE OR FROM THE  
INTERRUPTION, SUSPENSION, OR TERMINATION OF THE SITE OR DAMAGES  
INCURRED BY REASON OF OTHER SERVICES OR GOODS RECEIVED THROUGH  
OR ADVERTISED ON THIS SERVICE OR RECEIVED THROUGH ANY LINKS  
PROVIDED ON THIS SITE, AS WELL AS BY REASON OF ANY INFORMATION OR  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
270  
ADVICE RECEIVED THROUGH OR ADVERTISED ON THE SERVICES OR RECEIVED  
THROUGH ANY LINKS PROVIDED IN THE PRODUCTS AND SERVICES.  
(e) BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS PROHIBIT THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN  
WARRANTIES OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY  
NOT APPLY TO YOU. OUR OWN AND OUR SUPPLIERS’ TOTAL LIABILITY FOR  
DAMAGES, LOSSES, AND CAUSES OF ACTION, REGARDLESS OF LEGAL THEORY,  
WILL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE AGGREGATE DOLLAR AMOUNT YOU HAVE  
PAID TO US UNDER THESE TERMS, OR US $25.00, WHICHEVER IS GREATER.  
14. Indemnity  
You agree to indemnify and hold Sprint and its parents, suppliers, licensors,  
subsidiaries, affiliates, officers, and employees harmless from any claim or demand,  
including reasonable attorneys’ fees, made by any third party due to or arising out  
of: (1) use of the Service by you or by anyone using your account; (2) violation of  
these Terms by you or by anyone using your account; or (3) violation or  
infringement by you, or by anyone using your account, of intellectual property  
rights or any other rights of any other person.  
15. GeneralProvisions  
We may assign our rights and duties under these Terms to any third party at any  
time without notice to you. These Terms and the relationship between you and  
Sprint shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without regard to its  
conflict of law provisions. You and Sprint agree to submit to the personal and  
exclusive jurisdiction of the courts located within the State of California. You agree  
that regardless of any statute or law to the contrary, any claim or cause of action  
arising out of or related to use of the Service must be filed within one (1) year after  
such claim or cause of action arose or be forever barred. The failure of Sprint to  
exercise or enforce any right or provision of these Terms shall not constitute a  
waiver of such right or provision.  
If any provision of these Terms is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be  
invalid, the parties nevertheless agree that the court should endeavor to give effect  
to the parties’ intentions as reflected in the provision, and that the other provisions  
of the Terms shall be valid and remain in full force and effect.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
271  
Manufacturer’s Warranty  
CustomerLimitedWarranty  
SPRINT SPECTRUM, L.P., (Sprint) offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed  
subscriber unit (Product), including accessories in the product package, will be  
free from defects in material or workmanship as follows:  
SUBSCRIBER UNIT:  
A. SPRINT ONE (1) YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY: For a period of one (1) year from  
the date of purchase, Sprint will, at its option, either pay the parts and labor charges  
®
to any authorized PCS Phone service facility to repair or replace a defective  
product (with new or rebuilt parts/replacements). After this one (1) year period,  
you must pay all parts, shipping and labor charges.  
B. REPAIRS: For a period equal to the remainder of the original limited warranty  
period on an original Product or for the 180 days after the date of  
repair/replacement, whichever is longer, Sprint will repair or replace (with new or  
rebuilt replacement) defective parts or Product used in the repair or replacement  
of the original Product under this Limited Warranty.  
Proof of purchase in the from of a bill of sale or receipted invoice warranty repair  
document which is evidence that the Product is within the warranty period must  
be presented to obtain warranty service. This limited warranty is not transferable  
to any third party, including but not limited to any subsequent purchaser or owner  
of the Products.  
Transfer or resale of a Product will automatically terminate warranty coverage with  
respect to the Products.  
This limited warranty dose not cover and is void with respect to the following: (i)  
Products which have been improperly installed, repaired, maintained or modified  
(including the antenna); (ii) Products which have been subjected to misuse  
(including Products used in conjunction with hardware electrically or  
mechanically incompatible or used with accessories not supplied by Sprint), abuse  
accident, physical damage, abnormal operation, improper handling and storage,  
neglect, exposure to fire, water or excessive moisture or dampness or extreme  
changes in climate or temperature, (iii) Products operated outside published  
maximum ratings; (iv) cosmetic damage; (v) Products on which warranty stickers  
or Product serial numbers have been removed, altered, or rendered illegible; (vi)  
customer instruction; (vii) cost of installation, removal or reinstallation; (viii) signal  
reception problems (unless caused by defect in material and workmanship); (ix)  
damage the result of fire, flood, acts of God or other acts which are not the fault of  
Sprint and which the Product is not specified to tolerate, including damage caused  
by mishandling and blown fuses; (x) consumables (such as fuses); or (xi) any  
Products which have been opened, repaired, modified or altered by anyone other  
than Sprint or a Sprint authorized service center.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
272  
This warranty does not cover customer education, instruction, installation, set up  
adjustments, or signal reception problems.  
This warranty is valid only in the United States.  
USE WITH ACCESSORIES NOT SUPPLIED BY SPRINT OR OTHERWISE NOT  
EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED BY SPRINT MAY BE DANGEROUS.  
SPRINT SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS LIABILITY, AND SHALL HAVE NO  
OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE TO BUYER ANY OTHER REMEDY, FOR ANY AND ALL  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, GENERAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFITS, LOST SALES,  
LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS ARISING OUT OF  
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE ANY PRODUCT (FOR EXAMPLE, WASTED AIRTIME  
CHARGES DUE TO THE MALFUNCTION OF A PRODUCT), DAMAGE DUE TO  
IMPROPER OPERATION OR MAINTENANCE, INSTALLATION, CONNECTION TO  
IMPROPER VOLTAGE SUPPLY. OR ATTEMPTED REPAIR OF THE PRODUCT BY  
ANYONE OTHER THAN A FACILITY AUTHORIZED BY SPRINT. THIS WARRANTY  
DOES NOT COVER PRODUCTS SOLD AS IS OR WITH ALL FAULTS, OR  
CONSUMABLES, (SUCH AS FUSES). THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY WHEN  
THE MALFUNCTION RESULTS FROM USE OF THE PRODUCT IN CONJUNCTION  
WITH ACCESSORIES, PRODUCTS OR ANCILLARY OR PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT  
NOT SUPPLIED BY OR EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED FOR USE BY SPRINT, AND  
WHERE IT IS DETERMINED BY SPRINT THAT THERE IS NO FAULT WITH THE  
PRODUCT ITSELF.  
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AS PROVIDED UNDER THE WARRANTY, IS YOUR  
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY. TO  
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,  
SPRINT MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR AGAINST  
INFRINGEMENT WITHIN THE TIME PERIOD SPECIFIED IN THE LIMITED  
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THIS  
WARRANTY.  
Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential  
damages, or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty last, so the above  
limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights  
which vary from State to State.  
For other Warranty Service Information, please call PCS CUSTOMER SOLUTIONS at  
1- 888- 211- 4727.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
273  
Copyright(c) 2004 ACCESS Systems America Inc. ACCESS, NetFront are registered trademarks or trademarks  
owned by ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and selected countries worldwide. NetFront is a registered trademark of  
NetFront Communications, Inc.in the United States and is used under a license. Portions of this software are  
based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.  
TM  
Powered by JBlend Copyright 1997-2004 Aplix Corporation. All right reserved. JBlend and all JBlend-based  
trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix Corporation in Japan and other countries.  
Copyright © 2004 Sprint Spectrum L.P. All rights reserved. No reproduction in whole or in part without prior  
written approval. Sprint, the diamond logo design, and all other Sprint marks referenced herein are trademarks  
of Sprint Communications Company L.P. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.  
Section 4B: Terms & Conditions / Warranty  
274  
Call Waiting 183  
Callback Number 62  
Caller ID 183  
Calling in Lock Mode 67  
Chat 207  
Contacts  
Adding 89, 93  
Dialing 29  
Editing 93, 95  
Erasing 92  
Finding 28, 90  
Options 92  
Saving 27  
Secret 97  
Index  
A
Abbreviated Dialing 30, 59  
Advanced Information 111  
Airplane Mode 54  
Alarm Clock 111  
Alert Notification 42  
Answering Calls 21  
Any Key Answer 58  
Area Name 48  
Auto Answer 56  
B
Background 51  
Backlight Time Length 45  
Battery  
Capacity 16  
Charging 17  
Disposal 231  
Installing 16  
Removing 16  
Standby Time 16  
Talk Time 16  
Current Time Setting 62  
D
Dialing  
Abbreviated 30, 59  
Contacts 29  
Numbers With Pauses 28  
Options 20  
PCS Services 98  
Speed Dialing 30, 94, 148  
Voice-Activated Dialing 124  
Display Settings  
Area Name 48  
Background 51  
Backlight Time Length 45  
Display Screen 46  
Font Size 52  
Greeting 44  
Incoming Calls 47  
My Buddy 51  
Screen Saver 50  
Standby Mode 49  
Downloading  
Accessing Menus 208  
Data Size 122  
Erasing 70, 122  
Icon Indication 121  
Sorting 121  
C
Calculator 112  
Call Alarm  
Adding 104  
Alerts 105  
Editing 106  
Erasing 103, 109  
Menu 105  
Viewing 106  
Call Forwarding 185  
Call Guard 77  
Call History  
Erasing 87  
Making a Call 85  
Options 85  
Prepending 87  
Saving 86  
Viewing 84  
Viewing Memory 122  
Index  
275  
E
L
Email 204  
Language 63  
Limit Use 68  
Location Settings 53  
Lock Code 67  
Emergency Calling 25  
End-of-Call Options 27  
Event  
Adding 101  
Alerts 102  
Erasing 103, 109  
Menu 103  
Viewing 103, 106  
Locking Phone 66  
Locking Picture 67  
Locking through SMS 71  
M
Making Calls 18  
Making Ready Link Call 136, 137,  
138  
Menu Diagram 80  
Message Notification 61  
Messaging  
Displaying 194  
Folder  
Creating 200  
F
FCC Notice 232  
Features 14  
Font Size 52, 199  
G
Games  
Downloading 210  
Playing 211  
Greeting 44  
Drafts 196  
Editing 201  
Erasing 201, 202  
Outbox 197  
Font Size 199  
Moving a Message 201  
Options 197  
Picture Mail 194  
Prepending 199  
Sending 195, 196, 197  
Storage 194  
Mini Flashlight 63  
Missed Call Notification 25, 138  
Muting 24  
My Buddy 51  
My Shortcut 56  
H
Hard Pause 28  
Headset Mode 60  
Help 6  
I
Icon Indication 121, 161  
In-Call Options 26  
Input Mode  
Alphabet Mode 33  
Numbers 34  
Preset Suffixes 34  
Smileys 34  
Symbols 34  
T9 Text Mode 32  
Instant Messaging 206  
N
Net Guard 190  
Index  
276  
O
Customer Solutions 3, 5, 6, 65,  
71, 97, 273  
Directory Assistance 7  
Operator Services 7  
PCS Vision  
Online Picture Mail  
Auto Delete 160  
Managing 170  
Options 172  
Chat 207  
Sending 171  
Downloading 208  
Email 204  
Uploading 171  
Open/Close Flip Option 57  
Enabling and Disabling 72  
FAQs 222  
Games 210  
Launching 189  
Ringers 212  
Screen Savers 214  
Web 216  
PCS Voice Command 223  
Phone Number  
Dialing with Pauses 28  
Displaying 18  
Finding 28  
Saving 27  
PictureMail Password 154  
Pictures  
Auto Delete 160  
Flash 156  
Multiple Shots 157  
Options 155  
Self-timer 156  
Sending 162, 164  
Settings 159  
Shutter Sound 159  
Status Area 160  
Storing 165  
Taking 153  
Zoom 158  
P
Passcode 71  
PCS Business Connection 221  
PCS Ready Link  
Adding 143, 144  
Alert 134, 150  
Contacts List 135  
Copying 141  
Default View 151  
Editing 145  
Erasing 147  
Finding 142  
Making Calls  
by Entering Number 138  
Contact 136  
Group 137  
Options 140  
Preparing 134  
Ready Link Guard 149  
Receiving 139  
Redialing 140  
Restarting 149  
Ringer Types 150  
Saving 142  
Setting 133  
Speakerphone 151  
Speed Dialing 148  
Updating 148  
Power-off Tone 40  
Premium Services Content 208  
Prepend Dialing 87, 199  
Preset Messages 61  
Preset Suffixes 34  
PCS Services  
Call Forwarding 185  
Call Waiting 183  
Caller ID 183  
Index  
277  
Q
Secret Mode 97  
Security Menu  
Quiet Ringer 22  
Accessing 65  
R
Changing the Lock Code 67  
Locking Phone 66  
Unlocking Phone 66  
Shortcut 56  
Side Key Guard 58  
Silence All 43  
Sleep Mode 60  
Sound Settings  
Silence All 43  
Start-up/Power-off Tone 40  
Volume Settings 24, 41  
Speakerphone 23  
Special Number 69  
Speed Dialing 30, 94, 148  
Standby Time 16  
Start-up Tone 40  
Symbols 34  
Resetting  
Phone 70  
Picture Account 70  
Through SMS 71  
Ringer  
Assigning 213  
Downloading 212  
Purchasing 213  
Tone Length 40  
Types 36  
Volume 24, 41  
Roaming  
Analog Networks 75  
Digital Networks 74  
Setting 76  
S
Safety Guideline 226  
Scheduler  
Calendar 100  
Call Alarm 104  
Erasing 108, 109  
Event 101  
T
T9 Text Input 32  
Talk Time 16  
Three-Way Call 184  
To Do Items  
Adding 107, 108  
Deleting 108, 109  
Editing 107  
Memory 109  
Setting Holidays 100  
Setting the Time/Date 100  
To Do 107  
Screen Call  
Activating 129  
Erasing 131  
Recording 130, 131  
Reviewing 131  
Selecting Announcement 130  
Screen Savers  
Assigning 215  
Downloading 214  
Purchasing 215  
Viewing 107  
Tone Length 40  
TTY 55  
Turning On and Off 15  
2-Second Pause 28  
U
Unlocking Phone 66  
Unmute 24  
Updates 203  
User Address 110  
User Name 187  
Index  
278  
V
Version 110  
Voice Command  
Creating Address Book 224  
Getting Started 224  
Making a Call 225  
Voice Dial  
Erasing 125  
Programming 124  
Reviewing 125  
Using 124  
Voice Memo  
Erasing 128  
Options 127  
Recording 126  
Voice Prompt 40  
Voicemail  
Button Guide 178  
Clearing Message Icon 181  
Menu Key 182  
Message Alerts 177  
Notification 176  
Options 179  
Retrieving 177  
Setting Up 176  
Volume Settings  
During a Conversation 24  
Muting 24  
Ringer 24, 41  
W
Warranty 272  
Web  
Launching 189  
Navigating 191  
Net Guard 190  
User Name 187  
World Clock 49, 112  
Index  
279  

Teac HD 35 CRM User Manual
Targus External Cardbus Drive User Manual
Sony 1261 4434 User Manual
Sonic Impact Technologies SFT 1 User Manual
Silicon Laboratories F321DC User Manual
Seagate Momentus ST9808210A User Manual
RCA PORTABLE CD RCD159 User Manual
Radio Shack 63 117 User Manual
Philips HD7824 User Manual
Panasonic EB X100 User Manual